SIMPLY CLEVER

ŠKODA Superb
Owner's Manual
Preface

You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
The description of the vehicle operation, important information about safety, vehicle care, mainte-
nance and self-help, as well as technical vehicle data, are given in this manual.
Please read this Owner's Manual carefully, because the operation in accordance with these instruc-
tions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter referred to only as ŠKODA or manufacturer)


3T0012720AH
 MAXI DOT display 46 Climatronic (automatic air conditioning
Table of Contents Service interval display 48 system) 115
Board literature 4 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
Unlocking and opening 50
ventilation) 118
Notes 5 Unlocking and locking 50
Anti-theft alarm system 55 Communication and multimedia 121
Structure and more information about the General information 121
Operating Instructions 6 Luggage compartment lid 57
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi) 59 Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II 124
Abbreviations Electrical power windows 61 Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl 126
Electric sliding/tilting roof 64 Wi-Fi 130
Safety Panoramic sliding/tilting roof (Superb Estate) 65 Voice control 131
Multimedia 134
Passive Safety 8 Lights and visibility 67
General information 8 Lights 67 Driving
Correct and safe seated position 9 Interior lights 73
Visibility 75 Starting off and Driving 138
Seat belts 12 Starting and stopping the engine using the
Windscreen wipers and washers 77
Using seat belts 12 key 138
Rear mirror 79
Inertia reels and belt tensioners 15 Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY 140
Seats and practical features 81 Brakes 143
Airbag system 16
Adjusting the seats 81 Manual gear changing and pedals 144
Description of the airbag system 16
Seat features 85 Automatic transmission 145
Airbag overview 17
Practical features 88 Running in 148
Deactivating airbags 20
Luggage compartment 97 Economical driving and environmental
Transporting children safely 22 Removable light (Superb Combi) 103 sustainability 149
Child seat 22 Variable loading floor in the luggage Avoiding damage to your vehicle 152
Fastening systems 25 compartment (Estate) 104 Driving abroad 153
Extending variable loading floor with
Operation integrated aluminium rails and fastening Assist systems 154
elements (Superb Combi) 105 Brake assist systems 154
Cockpit 29
Net partition (Superb Combi) 107 Parking aid 156
Overview 28
Roof rack 108 Park assist 157
Instruments and Indicator Lights 30 Cruise Control System 161
Instrument cluster 30 Air conditioning system 110 START STOP 162
Warning lights 34 Heating, ventilation, cooling 110 Fatigue detection (break recommendation) 165
Air conditioning system (manual air Tyre pressure monitoring 165
Information system 42 conditioning system) 112
Driver information system 42 Hitch and trailer 166
Multifunction display (MFD) 44 Hitch 166
Trailer 170

2 Table of Contents
General Maintenance Technical data
Car care 173 Technical data 228
Services, modifications and technical Vehicle data 228
alterations 173
Washing vehicle 176 Index
Taking care of your vehicle exterior 177
Taking care of the interior 181
Inspecting and replenishing 183
Fuel 183
Engine compartment 186
Engine oil 189
Coolant 191
Brake fluid 192
Vehicle battery 193
Wheels 197
Tyres and wheel rims 197
Manufacturer-approved tyre variants 201
Winter operation 203

Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help 204
Emergency equipment 204
Changing a wheel 205
Puncture set 209
Jump-starting 211
Towing the vehicle 213
Radio remote control 215
Emergency unlocking/locking 216
Emergency operation of the sliding/tilting
roof 217
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 218
Fuses and light bulbs 220
Fuses 220
Replacing bulbs 223

Table of Contents 3
 Move Brochure
Board literature The Move brochure contains phone numbers of importers and service offices in
You always find these Operating Instructions and the Service Plan in the on- individual countries, together with emergency numbers.
board literature for your vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, the on-board literature can also contain The ra-
dio instruction manual or Manual of the navigation systemand in some coun-
tries also the brochure On the road.
Owner's Manual
These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and all
related model versions as well as all equipment levels.
This owner's manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in this Owner's Manual.
The scope of equipment on your vehicle depends on your purchase contract
for the vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment, please con-
tact a ŠKODA Partner, if required.
The Pictures in this manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illustrations
can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to provide
general information.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. pursues a policy of constant product and model develop-
ment. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time with regard to
design, equipment and technology. The information listed in this operating
manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press.
It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the technical
data, illustrations and information contained in this Owner's Manual.
Service schedule
The service plan includes the documentation of the vehicle handover informa-
tion with regard to warranty and service events.
The radio instruction manual
The instruction manual of the radio contains a description of the operation of
the radio, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.
Manual of the navigation system
The manual of the navigation system includes a description of the operation of
the navigation system, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.

4 Board literature
 Note
Notes
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
Terms used
The on-board literature contains the following terms relating to the service
work for your vehicle.
“Specialist garage” - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist garage can be a ŠKODA partner, a ŠKODA
service partner or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA service partner” - A Workshop that has been contractually authorised
by the manufacturer ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to perform
service tasks on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA partner” - A company that has been authorised by the manufacturer
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and,
when applicable, to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell
ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
Explanation of symbols
An overview of the symbols used in the instruction manual and a brief explan-
ation of their meaning.
Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor-

mation and safety warnings.
 Continuation of the module on the next page.
 Situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible.
® Trademark.
 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display .
 Text display in the segment display.

WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.

CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.

For the sake of the environment

Texts with this symbol contain information on environmental protection as
well as tips for economical operation.

Notes 5
Structure and more information about the Operating
Instructions

Structure of the manual

The operating manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas.
■ Section (e.g. Safety) - the title of the Section is always indicated at the lower
left side
■ Main chapters (e.g. Airbag System) - the title of the main chapter is always
indicated at the lower right side
■ Chapter (e.g. Airbag Overview)
■  Introduction to the topic - Module Overview within the chapter intro-
ductory information about the chapter content, if necessary, valid for
the entire chapter notes
■ Module (e.g. Front Airbags)

Information Search
When searching for information in the operating instructions, we recommend
using the Index at the end of the manual.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Units of measurement
The volume, weight, speed and length data are given in metric units, unless
otherwise indicated.
Display
In this owner's manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the dis-
play illustration, provided nothing is otherwise stated.

6 Structure and more information about the Operating Instructions

Abbreviations Abbreviation Definition
rSAP Remote transmission of the SIM data
Abbreviation Definition
SSP Connect two devices using Bluetooth ® profile
rpm Engine revolutions per minute Diesel engine with turbo-charging and common rail injection
TDI CR
ABS Anti lock brake system system
AF Multi-purpose vehicles TSA Trailer stabilisation
AHL Adaptive headlights TSI Petrol engine with turbo-charging and direct injection
AG Automatic gearbox UMTS the next generation of the GSM network (3G)
AGM Vehicle battery type VIN Vehicle identification number
APN An access point name for the Wi-Fi connection wireless connection of electronic devices for data transfer
WLAN
ASR Traction control (wireless)
CO2 Carbon dioxide
DPF Diesel particle filter
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
DSR active driver steering recommendation
EDL electronic differential lock
ECE Economic Commission for Europe
EPC Controller for the engine electronics
ESC Electronic Stability Control
ET Rim depth
EU European Union
FSI Stratified petrol direct injection
a digital network of mobile devices for the transmission of
GSM
voice and data
Connection of a mobile device by means of its Bluetooth®
HFP
profile
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
MG Manual gearbox
MFD Multifunction display
Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta-
N1
tion of goods
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
PIN personal identification number

Abbreviations 7
  Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Safety
 Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
Passive Safety  Secure all items of luggage.
 Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
General information the vehicle.
 Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
 Introduction  Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:  Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat
belts » page 22, Transporting children safely.
Before setting off 8
 Adopt the correct seated position » page 9, Correct and safe seated
Driving safety 8 position. Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position.
Safety equipment 8
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the sub- Driving safety
ject of passive safety in your vehicle.
 Read and observe on page 8 first.
We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for ex-
ample, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of children. The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving
safety is affected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk.
WARNING
The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
■ This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for
the driver and his occupants.  Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g.
■ You can find further information on safety concerning you and those trav- by your passengers or mobile phone calls.
elling with you in the following chapters of this owner's manual.  Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. due to medication, al-
■ The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This cohol or drugs.
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.  Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
 Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather condi-
Before setting off tions.
 Take regular breaks on long journeys – at least every two hours.
 Read and observe on page 8 first.

For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
Safety equipment
pay attention to the following points before setting off.  Read and observe on page 8 first.
 Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning proper-
ly. The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle.
 Ensure that the function of the wiper and the condition of the wiper › Three-point seat belts for all the seats.
blades are free of any defects. › Belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats.
 Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
› Belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats.
› Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats.
 Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. › Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger.
 Ensure that the mirrors are not covered. › Driver’s knee airbag. 

8 Safety
› Front side airbags. WARNING (Continued)
› Rear side airbags. ■ If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
› Head airbags. is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
› Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system. ■ The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this
› Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system. will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
› Head restraints adjustable for height. injury!
› Adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect
Correct seated position for the driver
you and those travelling with you in accident situations.
The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if
you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is
not correctly adjusted or used.
If the seat belt is not fastened properly, this may result in injuries if an airbag is
activated in the event of an accident.

Correct and safe seated position

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 1 Correct driver seating position / properly adjusted headrest

Correct seated position for the driver 9  Read and observe on page 9 first.
Adjusting the steering wheel position 10
Correct seated position for the front passenger 10 For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 11
 Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
Examples of incorrect seated positions 11
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
WARNING  For vehicles with driver knee air bag adjust the driver's seat in a forward/
■ The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs
body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag - B » Fig. 1.
provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.  Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat. can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
Children must be fastened » page 22, Transporting children safely with a  Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A between the steering
suitable restraint system. wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 1. Adjust the steering
■ If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life- wheel » page 10, Adjusting the steering wheel position.
threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.  Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head C » Fig. 1.
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 81. 

Passive Safety 9
 WARNING WARNING
■ Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not ■ The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked while you are
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidentally
the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is change during the journey – there is the risk of an accident!
moving. ■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis- the vehicle is stationary!
tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height
of the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that
the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! Correct seated position for the front passenger
■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
 Read and observe on page 9 first.
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position. Never hold the steering
wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle or For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
inner edge of the steering wheel). In such cases, you could severely injure ing instructions must be observed.
your arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed.  Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
■ Ensure that there are no objects in the driver's footwell, as these may get senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking. You would then no that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.  Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head C » Fig. 1 on page 9.
Adjusting the steering wheel position  Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 81.
Fig. 2
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactiva-
Adjustable steering wheel: Lever
ted » page 20, Deactivating airbags.
underneath the steering wheel
WARNING
■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel. Not maintaining
this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
properly protect you - hazard!
■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
 Read and observe on page 9 first. surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted. bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
› Swivel the lever underneath the steering wheel downwards » Fig. 2. seated position!
› Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position (with regard to the height
and forward/back position).
› Push the lever upwards to the stop.

10 Safety
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats  Do not lean out of the window.
 Do not put your feet out of the window.
 Read and observe on page 9 first.  Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an  Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.  Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell.
 Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at  Do not drive without fastening your seat belt.
the same level as the upper part of the head C » Fig. 1 on page 9.  Do not delay in the luggage compartment.
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12.
 Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi-
cle » page 22, Transporting children safely.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 81.

Examples of incorrect seated positions

 Read and observe on page 9 first.

Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened cor-
rectly.
Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the
seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing
of the seat belt.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers, especially children.
Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is
moving.
The following list contains instructions which, if not observed, may cause seri-
ous injuries or death. This list is not complete, however we would like you to
familiarise yourself with this subject.
Observe the following instructions while driving.
 Do not stand up.
 Do not stand on the seats.
 Do not kneel on the seats.
 Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back.
 Do not lean against the dash panel.
 Do not lie on the rear seats.
 Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
 Do not sit facing to the side.

Passive Safety 11
 WARNING
Seat belts
■ Fasten your seat belt before each journey - even when driving in town!
Using seat belts This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear – risk of injury!
■ Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
 Introduction of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child » page 14, Fastening
and unfastening seat belts.
■ Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seat-
Fig. 3
ed » page 9.
Driver wearing seat belt
■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.

WARNING
Information on the correct routing of the belt
■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even
in minor accidents.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
The physical principle of a frontal collision 13 belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no ac-
Fastening and unfastening seat belts 14 count across your neck.
Belt height adjustment on the front seats 15 ■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an suddenly held firm by the belt.
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival ■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
in the event of a major accident. cles, ball-point pens, bunches of keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated
position » Fig. 3. WARNING
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable Information on dealing with the safety belts
extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well re- ■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
sult in severe injuries. ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt when closing the door.
Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the
major benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as
WARNING
possible by the belts.
Information on the proper use of the safety belts
The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety meas- ■ Never use one seat belt to secure two persons (including children). The
ures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to the kinetic energy being re- seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another
duced as effectively as possible. The energy produced is thus absorbed and passenger. 
there is less risk of injury.
Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the
vehicle » page 22.

12 Safety
 WARNING (Continued) The physical principle of a frontal collision
■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
■ The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt
tongue will not lock in place properly.
■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
■ Do not use clamps or similar items, which prevent the lash lock function
of the safety belt from operating. A seat belt which is hanging too loose
can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy
produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt. Fig. 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt/rear seat passenger without a
■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably fastened seat belt
when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 87.
 Read and observe on page 12 first.
WARNING
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is
Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants.
■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belts may impair
proper operation of the inertia reel » page 183. The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at
■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at- which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself. occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.
to the seat belts, seat belt connections, inertia reel or the lock is detected, The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor. Doubling the speed of
the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage. the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four
■ Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
times.
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a
specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspec- The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor ac-
ted. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked. cident is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on
the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Note Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 - 50 km/h, the forces that your body is
The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts. exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric tonne (1000 kg).
For example, a person's weight of 80 kg “increases” to 4.8 tonnes (4800 kg) at
50 km/h.
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt
are thrown forward and strike parts of the interior of the car, such as the
steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen in ways which cannot be control-
led » Fig. 4 - . In certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the
vehicle, which could cause life-threatening or even fatal injuries. 

Seat belts 13
It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts, as they could › Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle belonging to the seat » Fig. 5 – 
otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the until it you hear it click into place.
event of an accident. › Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is
to himself but also for those seated in the front » Fig. 4 - . easy to get hold of.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
Fastening and unfastening seat belts maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must
roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest.
The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis, must not be lie across the
stomach and must always fit snugly » Fig. 6 - .
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of
ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child.
The lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis on
expectant mothers to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo-
men » Fig. 6 - .
Fig. 5 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt Release
Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary.
› Press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 5 - , the lock tongue pops out.
› Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing,
the seat belt does not twist.
CAUTION
When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not dam-
age the door trim or other parts of the interior.

Fig. 6 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Rout-
ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother

 Read and observe on page 12 first.

Fastening
› Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat
belt » page 9.
› Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis.

14 Safety
Belt height adjustment on the front seats Belt tensioners
The safety for the driver, front passenger and passengers on the outer rear
Fig. 7 seats who are wearing their seat belts, is enhanced by the belt tensioners fit-
Front seat: Seat belt height ad- ted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external seat belts.
juster
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal
collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the
seat belts are not fastened.
The seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a collision of a cer-
tain severity.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side
 Read and observe on page 12 first. and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in
which no major forces are produced from the front.
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the
front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size. WARNING
› Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc- ■ Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation
tion » Fig. 7. of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has out by a specialist garage.
correctly locked in place. ■ The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci-
dent. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to re-
Inertia reels and belt tensioners place the entire system.

 Introduction Note
■ Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
Inertia reels 15 ■ When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system, it is im-
Belt tensioners 15 portant to comply with national legal requirements. ŠKODA service partners
are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with de-
Inertia reels tailed information.

Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.

When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel.
The belts also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving
downhill and when cornering.

WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.

Seat belts 15
Airbag system System description

Description of the airbag system

 Read and observe on page 16 first.

The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light 
 Introduction in the instrument cluster » page 40.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: When the airbags are deployed, they fill with gas and inflate.
System description 16 A grey white or red, non-harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated.
Airbag deployment 16 This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system provides, as a supplement to the seat belts, additional oc- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
cupant protection during severe frontal and side collisions. following modules.
› Electronic control unit.
WARNING › Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger » page 17.
■ An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a › Driver’s knee airbag » page 18.
fastened seat belt. › Side airbags » page 19.
■ The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but instead forms part of › Head airbags » page 20.
the complete passive vehicle safety concept. › Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster » page 40.
■ To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect › Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 21.
when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be correctly adjusted to › Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation/activation in the
match the body size » page 9, Correct and safe seated position. middle of the dash panel » page 21.
■ If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased Note
risk of injury in the event of an accident. ■ The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
■ If you sell your vehicle, provide the complete vehicle documentation to the
WARNING new owner. Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de-
Information on the use of the airbag system activating the front passenger airbag must be included!
■ When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to
■ If there is a fault, the airbag system must be checked by a specialist ga-
rage immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activa- comply with the national legal requirements.
ted in the event of an accident.
■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system. Airbag deployment
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
 Read and observe on page 16 first.
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage. The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high-speed in order to be
■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork. able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident.
■ It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this
might result in the airbag being deployed. The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
■ The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one ac- In certain accident situations, the several airbags may be deployed simultane-
cident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de- ously. 
ployed.

16 Safety
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions, Side airbags 19
rear-end collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover. Head airbags 20
Deployment factors
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to Front airbags
the airbag system in every situation. An important role is played by factors
such as the type of object that the vehicle hits (hard/soft), the impact angle,
vehicle speed etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which
occurs. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the
relevant restraint system.
If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision
remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit,
the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe dam-
age to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
Fig. 8 Driver airbag in the steering wheel/front passenger airbag in the
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal dashboard
collision.
› Driver’s front airbag.
› Front passenger airbag.
› Driver’s knee airbag.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision.
› Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
› Rear side airbag on the side of the accident.
› Head airbags on the side of the accident.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
› The interior lighting illuminates (if the switch for the interior light is in the
door contact position).
› The hazard warning lights are switched on. Fig. 9 Safe distance to steering wheel/gas-filled airbags
› All the doors are unlocked.
› The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted. In the event of a severe frontal collision, the front airbag system offers addi-
tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger.
Airbag overview The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel » Fig. 8 - .

 Introduction The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel
above the glove compartment » Fig. 8 - .
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The airbags inflate in front of the driver and front passenger when they are
Front airbags 17 deployed » Fig. 9 - . The forward movement of the driver and of the front
Driver’s knee airbag 18 passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced. 

Airbag system 17
 WARNING Note
Information on correct seated position ■ In vehicles with head airbags, the lettering  can be seen on the steering
■ For the driver and front passenger, it is important to maintain a distance wheel.
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard A » Fig. 9. Not ■ In vehicles with front passenger airbags, the lettering  is located on the
maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will dash panel on the passenger side.
not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head
restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of Driver’s knee airbag
the occupant.
■ The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to
injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct.
■ There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.

WARNING
Front airbag and transporting children
■ Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing Fig. 10 Installation of the airbag / Safe distance from the switching panel
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Deactivating airbags. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal The driver's knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver's legs.
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child The driver's knee airbag A is located in the lower part of the dash panel below
on the front passenger seat, pay attention to any relevant national regula- the steering column » Fig. 10.
tions regarding the use of child safety seats.
In the event of a severe frontal collision, the driver's knee airbag and front air-
bags are deployed.
WARNING
General information The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
■ The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash pan-
the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus
el on the passenger side must not have stickers attached, be covered or reduced. 

modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth
that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects such as cup hold-
ers, mobile phone mounts, etc. must be attached to the covers of the air-
bag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity.
■ Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module
in the dash panel.

18 Safety
 WARNING The head airbag and belt tensioner on the relevant side are also automatically
■ Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap deployed when the side airbags » Fig. 11 -  are deployed.
of at least 10 cm between the legs B and the dash panel in the vicinity of The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated
the knee airbag » Fig. 10. If it is not possible to meet this requirement due airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pel-
to your body size, visit a specialist garage. vis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be-
low the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modified WARNING
in any other way. This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or Information on correct seated position
has been moistened with water. No objects must be attached to the cover ■ Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity. airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This ap-
■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the igni- plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable
tion key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and child safety seat » page 24, Child safety and side airbag.
can cause injuries. ■ There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accesso-
Note ries, such as cup holders, should be attached to the doors.
In vehicles with a driver's knee airbag, a symbol with  is located on the ■ If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
side panel on the driver's side. be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
can result in serious injuries » page 22, Child seat.
Side airbags
WARNING
■ The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the
front doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the
doors or door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further
information » page 175, Airbags.
■ Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
Fig. 11 Location of the side airbag in the driver's seat or gas-filled side air- non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro-
bag tective function of the side airbag.
■ Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag mod-
In the event of severe side collisions, the side airbag system provides addition- ule must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
al protection for the upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of passengers in ■ The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage,
the vehicle. cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open
The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the modules. 

the front seats » Fig. 11 - .

The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat
backrest.

Airbag system 19
 Note WARNING
■ In vehicles with side airbags at the front a label with the lettering  is lo- ■ There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head air-
cated on the front seat backrests. bags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
■ In vehicles with rear side airbags, the word  is located between the en- ■ Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
trance area and the rear seat rest. leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing. Additionally, clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items
Head airbags of clothing.
■ The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head
airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in
the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated,
parts of the fitted accessories could be thrown into the interior of the car
and injure the occupants.
■ The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the
deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens,
etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if
the head airbag is deployed.
■ There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. In ad-
Fig. 12 Location of the head airbag/gas-filled head airbag dition, none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window
when driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.
In the event of a severe side collision, the head airbag system offers additional
protection for the head and neck area of passengers. Note
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior In vehicles with head airbags, the lettering  can be seen on the B-column
of the car » Fig. 12 - . cladding.
In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the
relevant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the Deactivating airbags
accident occurs.
 Introduction
The airbag covers the windows of the front and rear doors, as well as the door
pillar when it is deployed » Fig. 12 - . This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag. The re- Deactivating airbags 21
duction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any move- Deactivating the front passenger airbag 21
ments of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area.
The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset im-
pact by covering the front door pillar.

20 Safety
Deactivating airbags Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below.
› If using a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat (due to different
legal regulations, the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards-facing
child seat in some countries) » page 22, Transporting children safely.
› If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the mid-
dle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly
adjusted.
› If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
of a physical disability.
› If different seats have been fitted (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side air-
bags). Fig. 13 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation
switch » page 21, Deactivating the front passenger airbag.
Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch.
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags. Switching off
Monitoring the airbag system
› Switch off the ignition.
The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically,
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
even if one of the airbags is switched off.
› Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
› Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 » Fig. 13 OFF.
› The warning light  illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
ignition and then flashes again for approx. 12 seconds. › Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
Front passenger airbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage com-
› Check that warning light  3     in the text illuminates after
the ignition is switched on.
partment
› The warning light  illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the Switching on
ignition. › Switch off the ignition.
› The   3 » Fig. 13 on page 21 warning light illuminates when the igni- › Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
tion is switched on. › Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
› Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Note › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 » Fig. 13 ON.
■ The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed. › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
■ A ŠKODA service partner will be able to inform you which, if any, of your vehi- › Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
cle's airbags can or must be deactivated. › Check that warning light  3     illuminates after the ignition
is switched on. 

Airbag system 21
 WARNING
Transporting children safely
■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off. Child seat
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.  Introduction
■ If the warning light  is flashing, the front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in an accident. Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga- This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
rage immediately. Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 23
■ The key cannot be inserted in the key switch while driving.
Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat 24
■ Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag!
Child safety and side airbag 24
■ The airbag could be triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result
in injury or death! Classification of child seats 25
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 25
CAUTION Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch! seat.
In contrast to adults, the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet
fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory pro-
visions.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard must be used. The ECE-R
standard stands for: Economic Commission for Europe - Regulation.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: a capital E in a circle and the certification num-
ber below

WARNING
■ The national legal requirements must be observed when using child
seats.
■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
■ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Certain outside climatic
conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.
■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants. 

22 Safety
 WARNING (Continued) Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the Does not apply to Taiwan
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries Fig. 14
if the airbag system is deployed! Sticker on the B-column on the
■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer front passenger side.
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat. Further information » page 23,
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat.

CAUTION
■ When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the head
restraints so that they are as high as possible.
■ If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in
the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 83. After remov-
ing the child seat, reinstall the head restraints.

Note Fig. 15 Front passenger sun visor / label

We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.  Read and observe and on page 22 first.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protec-
ted by an active airbag installed in front of it. This could cause serious injury
to the child, even death.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you install child seats on the rear
seats whenever possible.
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
› The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child
seat » .
› If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat. 

Transporting children safely 23

› If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con- Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
› With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around fit- Applies to Taiwan
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B-pillar on the passenger
side.
› Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
› Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
› Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac-
cording to the specifications in the manufacturer's user manual of the child
seat .

WARNING
■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Deactivating airbags. Fig. 16 Front passenger sun visor / label
■ Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-  Read and observe and on page 22 first.
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat.
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■ This fact is also indicated by the sticker that can be found in one of the This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found on the passenger's
following locations. sun visor » Fig. 16.
■ On the B-column on the front passenger side » Fig. 14. The sticker is
visible upon opening the front passenger door. Child safety and side airbag
■ On the front passenger's sun visor. In some countries, the sticker is lo-
cated on the front passenger's sun visor » Fig. 15.
Fig. 17
■ With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around
Incorrect seated position of a
fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at
child who is not properly secured
the same height as the loop-around fittings on the B-pillar on the passen-
– risk from the side airbag/Child
ger side.
properly protected by safety seat
■ As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer being used on the pas-
senger seat, the front passenger airbag should be reactivated again.

 Read and observe and on page 22 first.

The child must not be positioned in the area into which the side airbag will de-
ploy » Fig. 17 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the
side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as
possible » Fig. 17 - . 

24 Safety
 WARNING U Child seat category “Universal” - a child seat designed to be attached to
■ Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the seat using the seat belt.
the side airbag – risk of injury!
■ Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags – Fastening systems
risk of injury!
 Introduction
Classification of child seats This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Read and observe and on page 22 first. Attachment points of the -system 25
Use of child seats with the -system 26
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard. Attachment points of the  -system 27
Group Weight of the child Approximate age
Attachment points of the  -system
0 up to 10 kg up to 9 months
0+ up to 13 kg up to 18 months
Fig. 18
1 9 - 18 kg up to 4 years ISOFIX system label
2 15 - 25 kg up to 7 years
3 22 - 36 kg over 7 years

Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt

 Read and observe and on page 22 first.

Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of
 represents a system for a fast and secure child seat mounting.
the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
There are two locking eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of
Front passenger Rear seats Rear seat the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the  system child
Group
seat external Center seat in place.
0 On the rear outside seats, the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery.
U U U
up to 10 kg The places are marked with labels with the  logo » Fig. 18.
0+
U U U WARNING
up to 13 kg
1 ■ Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
U U U when installing and removing a child seat with the -system.
9 - 18 kg
■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
2
U U U eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the -system – risk
15 - 25 kg
of death! 
3
U U U
22 - 36 kg

Transporting children safely 25

 Note
■ A child seat fitted with the -system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with an -system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Child seats with the -system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories.

Use of child seats with the  -system

Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the -system on
each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.

Size class
Group Front passenger seatb) Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
of the child seata)
0
E X IL-SU X
up to 10 kg
E
0+
D X IL-SU X
up to 13 kg
C
D
C
1 IL-SU
B X X
9 - 18 kg IUF
B1
A
2
X IL-SU X
15 - 25 kg
3
X IL-SU X
22 - 36 kg
a) The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
b) If the front passenger seat is fitted with the  system attachment points, it is suited for the installation of an  child seat with the “Semi-Universal” approval.

IL-SU The seat is suited for installation of a -child seat with the “Semi-
Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child
seat with the -system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list
of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of a -child seat with the ap-
proval “Universal” and attachment with the  -system belt.
X The seat is not fitted with -system attachment points.

26 Safety
Attachment points of the   -system

Fig. 19
Anchor eyelets on the TOP
TETHER system

  represents a fastening system, which restricts movements of the up-
per part of the child seat.
The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the  -sys-
tem are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » Fig. 19.

WARNING
■ Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  -system.
■ Only use child seats with the  -system on the seats with the lock-
ing eyes.
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
■ On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.

Transporting children safely 27

 Fig. 20 Cockpit

28 Operation
 21 Light switch 68
Operation 22 Bonnet release lever 187
Cockpit 23 Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the head-
light beam range adjustment 68, 68
Overview 24 Storage compartment on the driver's side 89
25 Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 10
1 Electrical power windows 61
26 Driver’s knee airbag 18
2 Door opening lever 52
27 Ignition lock 139
3 Central locking button 55
28 Pedals 145
4 Air outlet vent 110
29 Handbrake 144
5 Parking ticket holder
30 Bars with buttons depending on the equipment fitted:
6 Operating lever: ›  START STOP 162
› Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight ›  Tyre pressure loss indicator 165
flasher 69 ›  Traction control ASR 155
› Speed regulating system 161 ›  Electronic Stability Control ESC 154
7 Steering wheel: ›  Park Assist 157
› with horn ›  Parking aid 156
› with driver’s front airbag 17 ›  Tailgate operation (Superb Combi) 59
› with pushbuttons for radio, navigation system phone and in- 31 Depending on equipment fitted:
formation system 122, 134 › Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 144
8 Instrument cluster: Instruments, warning lights and display 30 › Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 145
9 Operating lever: 32 Depending on equipment fitted:
› Information system 42 › Ashtrays 91
› Windscreen wiper and wash system 77 › Stowage compartment 90
10 Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel 110 33 Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag 21
11 Regulator for left seat heating 85 34 Depending on equipment fitted:
12 Button for hazard warning light system 72 › Operating controls for the air conditioning system 112
13 Regulator for right seat heating 85 › Operating controls for Climatronic 115
14 Depending on equipment fitted: Note
› Radio The arrangement of the controls right-hand drive models may differ from the
› Navigation system layout shown in » Fig. 20. The symbols on the controls and switches are the
15 Storage compartment on the front passenger side 94 same as for left-hand drive models.
16 Front passenger airbag 17
17 Air outlet vent 110
18 Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment) 21
19 Door opening lever 52
20 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 80

Cockpit 29
 Instruments and Indicator Lights Overview

Instrument cluster

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview 30
Revolution counter 31
Speedometer 31
Coolant temperature gauge 31
Display 31
Fuel gauge 32
Counter for distance driven 32
32 Fig. 21 Instrument cluster
Display of the second speed 33
Display in rear centre console 33  Read and observe on page 30 first.
Auto Check Control 33
1 Engine revolutions counter » page 31
Fault display › with warning lights » page 34
The Error message will appear in the display if there is a fault in the instru- 2 Speedometer » page 31
ment cluster. Ensure that the fault is rectified as soon as possible by a special- › with warning lights » page 34
ist workshop.
3 Button for display mode:
WARNING › Time settings » page 32
■ Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
› Enable/disable the display of the second speed1) » page 33
responsible for road safety.
› Service intervals - Display of the number of days and kilometres remain-
ing until the next service1) » page 48
■ Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving - risk of
accident. Operate the controls only when the vehicle is at a standstill. 4 Coolant temperature gauge » page 31
5 Display » page 31
6 Fuel gauge » page 32
7 Button for:
› Reset trip meter » page 32
› Setting the time » page 32
› Enable/disable the mode selected by means of button 3

1) Applies for vehicles with a segment display.

30 Operation
 Revolution counter Cold range
The pointer in the left of the scale indicates that the engine has not yet
 Read and observe on page 30 first. reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds, full throttle and high
engine loads. This prevents possible damage to the engine.
The red scale of the revolution counter 1 » Fig. 21 on page 30 indicates the
range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed. The system auto- The operating range
matically restricts the engine speed to a steady limit. The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer
moves into the middle of the scale. At very high ambient temperatures or un-
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu- der heavy engine loads, the pointer may move even further to the right.
tion counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox.
High temperature range
Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or The coolant temperature is too high if the pointer reaches the red area of the
too low » page 43. scale. Further information » page 36.

Speedometer CAUTION
■ Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
 Read and observe on page 30 first.
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
Warning against speeding ■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
An audible warning will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h1). The
audible warning is switched off once the vehicle speed falls below 120 km/h. Display

Coolant temperature gauge Fig. 23

Display types
Fig. 22
Coolant temperature gauge

 Read and observe on page 30 first.

The following information will be displayed.

 Read and observe on page 30 first.
› Distance travelled » page 32
The coolant temperature gauge » Fig. 22 only operates when the ignitions is › Time » page 32
switched on. › Details of the information system » page 42
› Details of the service interval display » page 48 

1) This function is only valid for some countries.

Instruments and Indicator Lights 31

Display types » Fig. 23. Counter for distance driven
 Segment display
 MAXI DOT display Fig. 25
Segment display / MAXI DOT dis-
CAUTION play
Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display (e.g. when clean-
ing) to prevent any possible damage. On vehicles with the KESSY system,
switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 24  Read and observe on page 30 first.

Fuel gauge
Display » Fig. 25
A Trip odometer
B Odometer

Daily trip counter (trip)

The counter indicates the distance you have driven since it was last reset - in
steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.
 Read and observe on page 30 first. Reset trip meter
› Press and hold button 7 » Fig. 21 on page 30.
The fuel gauge » Fig. 24 only operates if the ignition is switched on.
Odometer
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres. If the amount of fuel reaches The odometer indicates the total distance which the vehicle has been driven.
the reserve area (the pointer reaches the red scale range), the indicator symbol
is illuminated  » page 39. Note
If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display, this
CAUTION speed will be shown instead of the odometer.
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

Note Use buttons 3 and 7 to set the time » Fig. 21 on page 30.
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves, 3 The choice to change the display (hours or minutes).
braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates ap- 7 The change of the displayed value.
prox. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the fuel
In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display, it is also possible to set the
gauge displays the correct fuel level again. This is not a fault.
Time in the Time menu » page 47.

32 Operation
 Display of the second speed Auto Check Control
 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Read and observe on page 30 first.

The display can show the current speed in mph1). Vehicle condition
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
This feature is provided for driving in countries with different units for speed.
continuously when the ignition is switched on.
MAXI DOT display
Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT
The display of the second speed can be set in the Alt. speed dis. menu
display. The messages are displayed simultaneously with the icons in the MAXI
item » page 47, Settings.
DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster » page 34,
Segment display Warning lights.
› Press the 3 » Fig. 21 on page 30key repeatedly, until the odometer display The Vehicle status menu item is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT
flashes » page 32. display whenever at least one fault message is present. The first of the fault
› Press the 7 key while the display is flashing. messages is displayed after this menu item is selected. Several error messages
The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer. are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This indicates that the
first of a total of three error messages is being displayed.
Display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way.
Warning symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Display in rear centre console
 Engine oil pressure too low » page 36

Fig. 26 Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are

Centre console at rear: Display  too hot
» page 33

Check engine oil level,

 engine oil sensor defective
» page 37

 Thickness of brake pads » page 41

 Problem with engine oil pressure » page 33

 Read and observe on page 30 first.  Problem with the engine oil pressure
If the  symbol is shown in the MAXI DOT display, you must have your vehicle
The time and the outside temperature are displayed on the display in the rear checked immediately by a specialist garage. The information about the maxi-
centre console when the ignition is switched on » Fig. 26. mum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol.
The values are taken over by the instrument cluster.  Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot
If the  symbol appears in the MAXI DOT display, this indicates that the tem-
perature of the automatic DSG gearbox clutches is too high. 

1) On models on which the speedometer indicates mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.

Instruments and Indicator Lights 33

The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.  Anti lock brake system (ABS) 38
 Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's manual!  Rear fog light 38
 Lamp failure 38
 do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and wait
 Adaptive headlights (AHL) 38
until the  icon goes out – risk of gearbox damage! You can continue your
 Exhaust inspection system 38
journey as soon as the icon disappears.
 Glow plug system (diesel engine) 38
WARNING  Engine performance check (petrol engine) 39
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe  Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine) 39
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard  Fuel reserve 39
warning light system » page 72. The warning triangle must be set up at  Airbag system 40
the prescribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing  Tyre inflation pressure 40
so.  Windscreen washer fluid level 40
 Brake linings 41
Note   Turn signal system 41
■ If the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages, these messages must be  Low beam 41
confirmed in order to access the main menu » page 42 .
 Fog lights 41
■ As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always in-
 Cruise control system 41
dicated again. After they are displayed for the first time, the symbols continue
to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver.  Selector lever lock / starter (system KESSY) 41
 Main beam 41
Warning lights The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
 Introduction
the display of the instrument cluster.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
 Handbrake 35 tion test.
 Brake system 35 If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go out a few
 Seat belt warning light 35 seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine. 
 Generator 35
 Door open 36
 Engine oil pressure 36
 Coolant 36
 Bonnet 36
 Boot lid 36
  Power steering / steering lock (system KESSY) 36
 Engine oil level 37
 Traction Control System (ASR) 37
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 37

34 Operation
 WARNING WARNING
■ Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions ■ If the warning light  together with the warning light  » page 38, 
in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or Anti lock brake system (ABS) illuminates,  do not continue to drive! Seek
damage to the vehicle. help from a specialist garage.
■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe ■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard cle's braking distance – there is a risk of accident.
warning light system » page 72. The warning triangle must be set up at ■ The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet
the prescribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing and checking the brake fluid level » page 186, Engine compartment.
so.
■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-  Seat belt warning light
gine compartment » page 186, Engine compartment.  Read and observe on page 35 first.

The warning light  is illuminated as a reminder for the driver and front pas-
 Handbrake senger to fasten their seat belts.
 Read and observe on page 35 first. The warning light  goes out, after the respective seat belt has been fas-
tened.
The warning light  illuminates if the handbrake is applied.
If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h for at least
speed is more than 20 km/h, the warning light  flashes and you will hear an
3 seconds while the handbrake is applied.
acoustic warning signal.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
The warning signal is switched off and the warning light  remains perma-
 Release parking brake! nently illuminated if the driver and front passenger have not fastened their
seat belts within the next 90 seconds.
 Brake system
 Generator
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light  illuminates if the brake fluid level in the braking system is
too low or there is a fault in the ABS. If the warning light  is illuminated, when the engine is running, the vehicle
battery is not being charged.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. The electrical system re-
 Brake fluid: Owner's manual!
quires checking.
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake flu-
id » page 193 » . CAUTION
 Do not continue driving if the  warning light (coolant system fault) illumi-
nates in addition to the  warning light while you are driving. Stop the engine
- there is a risk of engine damage. Seek help from a specialist garage.

Instruments and Indicator Lights 35

  Door open If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light  is never-
theless still illuminated,  do not continue your journey!
 Read and observe on page 35 first. Seek help from a specialist garage.
The warning light  illuminates if one or several doors are opened. WARNING
■ Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot, the cool-
 Engine oil pressure ing system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is therefore best to allow the
 Read and observe on page 35 first. engine to cool down before removing the cap.
■ Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may switch itself on auto-
When the warning light is flashing , the engine oil pressure is too low. matically even if the ignition is off - a danger of injury is present!
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
CAUTION
 Oil pressure: Engine off. Owner's manual! ■ Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil lev- impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
el » page 190. ■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.

If the warning light  flashes do not drive any further, even if the oil level is
correct! Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.  Bonnet
Seek help from a specialist garage.  Read and observe on page 35 first.

The warning light  illuminates if the bonnet is unlocked.

 Coolant
 Read and observe on page 35 first.  Boot lid
If the warning light  illuminates or flashes, either the coolant temperature is  Read and observe on page 35 first.
too high or the coolant level is too low.
The warning light  illuminates if the boot lid is opened.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
 Check coolant! Owner's manual!   Power steering / steering lock (system KESSY)
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and check the coolant lev-  Read and observe on page 35 first.
el » page 192.
› If the coolant level is too low, top up coolant » page 192. Power steering
If the warning light  is illuminated, this indicates a partial failure of the Pow-
If the warning light  does not illuminate, after adding coolant and switching
er Steering and the steering forces can be greater.
on the ignition, you may continue your journey.
If the warning light  is illuminated, this indicates a complete failure of the
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light is still
power steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering
illuminated, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
forces).
› Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary » page 222, Fuses in › Stop the car, turn the ignition off and on again.
the engine compartment.
The powered steering is fully functional again if the  or  warning light does
not illuminate after you switch the engine back on. 

36 Operation
If the warning light  or  illuminates again, then immediately obtain help If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, the warning light  flashes several
from an authorised dealer. times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on.
Steering lock (KESSY system) Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
A long as the warning light  flashes, the steering lock cannot be released.
If the warning light  flashes, a signal tone sounds, and the following mes-  Traction Control System (ASR)
sage appears in the MAXI DOT- display Steering column lock. Workshop! ap-  Read and observe on page 35 first.
pears the electrical steering lock is faulty. Seek assistance from a specialist ga-
rage immediately. If the warning light  flashes, the ASR is currently operating.
If the warning light flashes , a beep will sound and a message Steering lock: If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the ASR.
defective appears in theMAXI DOT display, this indicates that the electric
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
steering lock is broken. Park the vehicle, do not continue your journey!. Af-
ter switching off the ignition, it is then no longer possible to lock the steering,  Fault: Traction control (ASR)
to activate the electrical components (e.g. radio, navigation system), to switch Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
on the ignition again and to start the engine. Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage. If the warning light  illuminates immediately after you start the engine, the
ASR might be switched off due to technical reasons.
Note
The  warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
› Switch the ignition off and on again.
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light  If the warning light  does not illuminate any more after the engine is switch-
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in ed on again, then the ASR is fully functional again.
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Further information » page 155.

 Engine oil level Note

The  warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light 
The warning light  illuminates (oil quantity too low) does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display. the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Check oil level!
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil lev-
el » page 190.  Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec- The warning light  flashes, to show that the ESC is currently operating.
onds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on
again after driving about 100 km. If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the ESC.

The warning light  flashes (engine oil level sensor faulty) The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.  Fault: Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
 Oil sensor: Workshop! Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. 

Instruments and Indicator Lights 37

If the warning light  illuminates immediately after you start the engine, the  Lamp failure
ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons.
› Switch the ignition off and on again.  Read and observe on page 35 first.

If the warning light  does not illuminate again after the engine is switched The warning light  illuminates if a lamp is faulty.
on again, the ESC is fully functional again. The warning light  illuminates within a few seconds after switching on the
Further information » page 154. ignition or when a light with a faulty lamp is switched on.
The following message may be shown in the MAXI DOT display, for example.
Note
The  warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-  INFORMATION Check front right low beam!
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light 
does not go out after moving a short distance, this means there is an error in  Adaptive headlights (AHL)
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
 Anti lock brake system (ABS) If the warning light  flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on
the ignition, there is a problem with the adaptive headlights.
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
If the warning light  is illuminated, there is a fault in the ABS.
 No bend lighting (AHL) function. Owner's manual!
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
When the AHL mode “tourist light” (travel mode) is active » page 71, the
 Fault: ABS warning light flashes for 10 seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
 Exhaust inspection system
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
■ If the warning light  together with the warning light  » page 35,  If the warning light  is illuminated, there is a fault in the exhaust inspection
Brake system illuminates,  do not continue to drive! Seek help from a system. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
specialist garage.
■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
cle's braking distance – there is a risk of accident.
 Glow plug system (diesel engine)

 Rear fog light  Read and observe on page 35 first.

 Read and observe on page 35 first. The warning light  illuminates after the ignition has been turned on. Once
the light has gone out, the engine can be started immediately.
The warning light  illuminates when the rear fog light is switched on.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light  does not come
on at all or illuminates continuously.
If the warning light  begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine
control. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode. 

38 Operation
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. WARNING
■ The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
 Engine performance check (petrol engine) fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled
If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the engine control. The fuel or such like.
■ Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic condi-
system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
tions. The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic.

 Diesel particulate filter (diesel engine) CAUTION

 Read and observe on page 35 first. ■ As long as the warning light  illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of
The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The the engine.
soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a ■ Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the
regular basis. service life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA Partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content.
If the warning light  illuminates, rust has accumulated in the filter.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for Note
at least 15 minutes or until the warning light goes out. ■ We recommend avoiding regularly driving short distances to assist the com-
 4th or 5th is selected (automatic transmission: position S). bustion process of the soot particles in the filter.
■ If the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after-
 Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
wards, the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes.
 Engine speed between 1,800 - 2,500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light  goes out.  Fuel reserve
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does  not go out and  Read and observe on page 35 first.
the warning light  begins to flash.
The warning light  illuminates, if the fuel level is less than approx. 10.5 litres.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
 Diesel particulate filter: Owner's manual!
 Please refuel. Range: ... km
The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode. After switching the
ignition off and on again the warning light,  also illuminates. CAUTION
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.

Note
The text in the display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short dis-
tance.

Instruments and Indicator Lights 39

  Airbag system › Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 198.
 Read and observe on page 35 first. › Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the wheel » page 205 or
use the repair kit » page 209.
If the warning light  illuminates, there is a fault in the airbag system. › Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 166.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display. The warning light flashes for about 1 min. and remains lit
 Fault: Airbag If the warning light  flashes for approximately 1 minute and stays on, there
may be a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system.
The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically,
even if one of the airbags is switched off. › Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If a front, side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using If the warning light  flashes again after the engine has started, there is a
the vehicle system tester: system error.
› The warning light  illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the igni- Seek help from a specialist garage.
tion is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds.
The following reasons can explain the warning light  being illuminated.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display. › The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute loads as evenly as possible.
 Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated. › The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
If the front passenger's front airbag was switched off using the key-operat-
ed switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side:
› Snow chains are mounted.
› The warning light  illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the igni- › A wheel has been changed.
tion is switched on; Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 166.
› The deactivated air bag is indicated by the illumination of the warning light CAUTION
    in the middle of the dash panel » page 21.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
WARNING roads) the warning light  in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does
When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not not light up at all.
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
Note
checked immediately by a specialized company.
The  warning light illuminates after the ignition is switched on if the vehi-
cle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected. If the warning light does
 Tyre inflation pressure not go out after moving a short distance, this means that there is an error in
the system. Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Read and observe on page 35 first.

The warning light  is illuminated  Windscreen washer fluid level

If while driving, the warning light  illuminates, a tyre pressure change has oc-
curred.
 Read and observe on page 35 first.

An audible signal sounds as a warning signal. If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low, the warning light  illumi-
nates. 
› Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.

40 Operation
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.  Cruise control system
 Top up wash fluid!
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
Top up with liquid » page 188, Windscreen washer system.
The warning light  illuminates when the cruise control is active.
 Brake linings
 Selector lever lock / starter (system KESSY)
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
 Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light  is illuminated, the brake pads are worn.
If the warning light  illuminates, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display. to move the selector lever from position P and N » page 146or to start the en-
 Check brake wear! gine in vehicles with the KESSY system » page 142.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Main beam
  Turn signal system  Read and observe on page 35 first.
 Read and observe on page 35 first. The warning light  illuminates when the main beam or the headlight flasher
is being operated.
Either the left  or the right  warning light flashes depending on the position
of the turn signal lever.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
its normal rate.
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of
the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.

 Low beam
 Read and observe on page 35 first.

The warning light  illuminates when low beam is selected.

 Fog lights
 Read and observe on page 35 first.

The warning light  illuminates when the fog lamps are operating.

Instruments and Indicator Lights 41

Information system Using the information system

Driver information system

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Using the information system 42
Display a low temperature 43
Gear recommendation 43
Door, boot or engine compartment warning 44
The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about in- Fig. 27 Buttons / wheel: on the operating lever / on the multifunction
dividual vehicle systems. steering wheel
This information and advice is shown in the instrument cluster display or indi-  Read and observe on page 42 first.
cated by the illumination of the corresponding warning light in the instrument
cluster. Some functions of the information system can be operated using the buttons
The information system provides the following information and instructions on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 27.
(depending on vehicle equipment). Description of the operation
› Data relating to the multi function display (MFD) » page 44.
› Data relating to the MAXI DOT display » page 46. Button/
Action Function
› Service interval display » page 48. wheel
› Auto Check Control » page 33. Briefly push up or down Select data / set data values
› Selector lever positions for an automatic transmission » page 145. A Display main menu of the
Press and hold button
MAXI DOT display » page 46
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re- B Press briefly View information / confirm specification
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle. To return up one level in the menu of
Press briefly the
C MAXI DOT display » page 46
Press button for a long Display main menu of the
period of time MAXI DOT display » page 46
Turn upwards or down-
Select data / set data values
D wards
Press briefly View information / confirm specification

42 Operation
 Display a low temperature  Read and observe on page 42 first.

 Read and observe on page 42 first. The function of the gear recommendation is to help reduce fuel consumption.
A suitable gear is engaged, if necessary, a recommendation to shift to high or
Display in the MAXI DOT display lower gear is displayed.
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the following
icon appears on the display in front of the temperature display . An audible Display » Fig. 28
signal is emitted.  Optimal gear engaged
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,  Recommended gear
the  icon appears immediately.
Recommended gear
Prompt in the segment display The gear recommendation is intended only for vehicles with a manual trans-
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the temperature mission or for vehicles with an automatic transmission in manual shift mode
display will show up with the following icon before this occurs . An audible (Tiptronic).
signal is emitted.
The recommended 1) gear and the arrow icon 2) is displayed.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on, ›  - Recommends that you shift to a higher gear
the temperature display and the  icon appear immediately. ›  - Recommends that you shift to a lower gear
After pressing button A » Fig. 27 on page 42, the most recently displayed data If for example  is shown in the display with vehicles that have manual gear-
is shown. boxes this indicates that it is better to shift from a lower gear to the 4th gear.

WARNING If for example  is shown in the display with vehicles that have automatic
gearboxes and are in the manual switching mode (Tiptronic), this indicates
Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, there may still be black ice on the
that it is better to shift from the 4th gear to a higher gear.
road surface. You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera-
ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road. WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
Gear recommendation driving situations, such as overtaking.

Fig. 28 For the sake of the environment

Information on the selected A suitably selected gear has the following advantages.
gear / gear recommendation ■ It helps to reduce fuel consumption.
■ It reduces engine noise.
■ It protects the environment.
■ It benefits the life and reliability of the engine.

1) With vehicles that have an automatic gearbox and in the manual switching mode (Tiptronic) the current-
ly engaged gear is shown.
2) For vehicles with segment display the arrow is displayed behind the gear indication.

Information system 43
Door, boot or engine compartment warning Note
■ In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
 Read and observe on page 42 first. measures.
■ If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is
Vehicles with a MAXI DOT display
not indicated in km/h on the display.
If at least one door, the boot or bonnet is open, the display indicates the rele- ■ The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
vant open door, boot or bonnet vehicle icon.
Vehicles with a segment display Memory
If at least one door or the boot or bonnet is open, the warning lights  or 
and  come on in the instrument cluster » page 34, Warning lights. Fig. 29
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a Multi function display - memory display
door is open.

Multifunction display (MFD)

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Memory 44  Read and observe on page 44 first.
Information overview 45
In memory the values of elements of the multifunction display(e.g. average
Warning at excessive speeds 46
fuel consumption) are recorded.
The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display. The multifunction display is equipped with two memories, 1 and 2.
The multifunction display only operates when the ignition is switched on. After Display of the selected memory in the display at position A » Fig. 29
the ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before switch-
ing off the ignition is displayed.  Single-trip memory
 Total-trip memory
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, the menu item MFD must be selected
and confirmed in the main menu » page 46, MAXI DOT display. Select memory
On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, there is an option to fade out some of › Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 45.
the information » page 47, Settings. Confirm the element again to switch between the individual memories.

WARNING Resetting
■ Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully › Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 45.
responsible for the operation of your vehicle. › Select the desired memory.
■ Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, there may still be black ice on the › Press and hold button B or adjustment wheel D » Fig. 27 on page 42.
road surface. You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera- Single-trip memory (memory 1)
ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road. The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the
ignition is switched on until it is switched off. 

44 Operation
New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes ()
the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition. and 99 hours and 59 minutes (). The indicator is set back to zero when this
period is exceeded.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased. Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres/100 km1). You can use
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption.
The total-trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up
to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1 999 kilometres driven (), and a total The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
of 99 hours and 59 minutes or 9 999 kilometres driven (). speed2).
The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calcula- Average fuel consumption
tion starts all over again. The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed
Unlike the single-trip memory, the total-trip memory is not deleted after a pe- in litres/100 km1).
riod of interruption of driving of 2 hours. Set the memory to zero at the start of a new measurement if you wish to de-
termine the average fuel consumption over a certain period » page 44, Memo-
The following values of the selected memory are set to zero.
ry. After erasing the memory, no value is displayed until you have driven ap-
› Average fuel consumption. prox. 300 m.
› Distance driven.
› Average speed. The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
› Driving time. Range
Note The range indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data. the level of fuel in the tank and with the same style of driving as before.
The display is shown in steps of 10 km. The value is displayed in steps of 5 km
Information overview after the  has come on.

 Read and observe on page 44 first. The fuel consumption over the preceding 50 km is used to calculate the infor-
mation. The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner.
Outside temperature If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), a fuel consump-
The current outside temperature is displayed. tion of 10 l./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is updated
This information is always shown on vehicles with a MAXI DOT display. according to the style of driving.
Driving time Distance travelled
The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed. The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time, Reset the memory to zero if you want to measure the distance travelled from
reset the memory to zero at that point in time » page 44, Memory. a particular moment » page 44, Memory.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km. () and
9 999 km (). The indicator is set back to zero when this period is exceeded. 

1) On some models in certain countries, the display appears in kilometres/litre.

2) On some models in certain countries, – -.- km/ltr. is displayed when the vehicle is stationary.

Information system 45
Average speed Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km/hour . › Select the menu item Speed warning (  ) or  ( ).
Set the memory to zero at the start of measurement to determine the average › Drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h.
speed over a certain period » page 44, Memory. › Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
If you wish to adjust the set speed limit, you can do so in 5 km/h intervals (e.g.
After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m driven.
the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45 km/h).
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
› +Store the speed limit, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
Current driving speed automatically.
The current speed displayed is identical to the display on the speedometer
Change or disable speed limit
2 » Fig. 21 on page 30.
› Select the menu item Speed warning (  ) or  ( ).
Oil temperature1) › By confirming the stored value, the speed limit is disabled.
If the engine oil temperature is in the range of 80-110 °C, the engine operating › By reconfirming, the option to change the speed limit is activated.
temperature has been reached.
If the set speed limit is exceeded, an audible signal will sound as a warning.
If the oil temperature is lower than 80 °C or above 110 °C, avoid high engine The Speed warning (MAXI DOT display) or  (segment display) menu item ap-
revs, full throttle and high engine loads. pears in the display with the limit set.
If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for check- The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and
ing the oil temperature is present,  . symbols are displayed instead of the oil on.
temperature.
Warning against speeding MAXI DOT display
Set the speed limit, e.g. for the maximum permissible speed in
towns » page 46, Warning at excessive speeds.  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Warning at excessive speeds
Main menu 47
 Read and observe on page 44 first. Settings 47
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary Compass point display 48
› Select the menu item Speed warning (  ) or  ( ). The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operat-
› Activate the speed limit option by confirming this menu item2). ing state of your vehicle. Depending on the vehicle equipment, it also provides
› Set the desired speed limit, e.g. 50 km/h. you with data relating to the radio, multifunction display (MFD), mobile phone,
› Store the speed limit by confirming the set value, or wait several seconds. navigation system, automatic gearbox and devices connected via the MDI in-
Your settings will be saved automatically. put. Furthermore, it allows the adjustment of some other features of your ve-
The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km/h to 250 km/h in 5 km/h incre- hicle. 

ments.

1) Applies for vehicles using the MAXI DOT display.

2) An initial value of 30 km/h is displayed automatically if no value has been specified.

46 Operation
 WARNING Language
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully re- You can set the language for the display texts here.
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle. Automatic blind (Combi)
This is where the automatic roll up function of the boot roll cover can be deac-
Main menu tivated/activated when opening the boot lid.
MFD data
 Read and observe on page 47 first.
Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here.
Press and hold button A or C » Fig. 27 on page 42 to activate the MAIN Convenience
MENU. By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher. The following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted here.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
Activate/deactivate the function for automatically
■ MFD (Multifunction display) » page 44 closing the window and the tilt/slide sunroof in a
■ Audio » Operating instructions for the radio locked vehicle when it starts raininga). If the function
■ Navigation » Operating instructions for the navigation system Rain closing
is activated and it is not raining, the windows includ-
■ Phone » page 121; ing the panoramic tilt/slide sunroof will close auto-
■ Aux. heating » page 118 matically after approx. 12 hours.
■ Assist systems » page 165
Switch on/off the audible signal indicating activation
■ Vehicle status » page 33
ATA confirm of the anti-theft alarm system. Further informa-
■ Settings » page 47
tion » page 55.
The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory fit- Switch on/off the central locking and automatic lock-
ted radio or navigation system is switched on. Central locking ing function, also applies to the KESSY system. Fur-
ther information » page 54, Individual settings.
Note
Only convenience mode for the driver window or for
■ If warning messages are displayed, these messages must be verified to ac-
all of the windows can be adjusted here. Further in-
cess the main menu » page 42, Using the information system. Window op.
formation » page 63, Window convenience opera-
■ If the display is not activated at that moment, the menu always shifts to one
tion.
of the higher levels after approx. 10 seconds.
■ Using the factory fitted radio or navigation system » Radio operating instruc- Activate/deactivate the function for mirror lowering
tions or» Navigation system operating instructions. on the front passenger side when in the reverse
Mirror down
gearb). Further information » page 80, Fold in pas-
senger's mirror.
Settings
Activation / deactivation of the synchronous exterior
 Read and observe on page 47 first. mirror function settings. Further informa-
Mirror adjust.
tion » page 80, Synchronous adjustment of the mir-
You can change certain settings yourself through the MAXI DOT display. The ror.
current menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line.
Factory setting Restore the Convenience factory setting.
The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment in-
a) This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor.
stalled in the vehicle). b) This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat. 

Information system 47
Lights and visibility Units of measurement
The following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted here. The units for the temperature, consumption and distance driven can be set
here.
Activate/deactivate and adjust the light duration of
Coming Home the COMING HOME function. Further informa- Assist systems
tion » page 72. The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here.
Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Alt. speed dis.
Leaving Home LEAVING HOME function. Further informa- Display of the second speed in mph1) can be activated here.
tion » page 72.
Further information » page 33, Display of the second speed.
Activate/deactivate and adjust the footwell light in-
Footwell light
tensity. Service
Activate/deactivate “DAY LIGHT” function. Further in- The days and kilometres remaining until the next service can be displayed
Dayl. dri. light formation » page 69, Daylight running lights (DAY here.
LIGHT). Further information » page 48, Service interval display.
Activate/deactivate the function of the automatic
Factory setting
Rear wiper rear window wiping. Further information » page 78,
The display functions can be restored to their factory settings here.
Automatic rear window wiper (Superb Combi).
Activate/deactivate the lane ch. flash function. Fur- Compass point display
Lane ch. flash
ther information » page 70.
Activate/deactivate the travel mode feature. Further  Read and observe on page 47 first.
Travel mode
information » page 71, Tourist lights (Travel mode).
For vehicles with a factory fitted navigation system, an abbreviation for each
Factory setting Restore the factory setting for the lighting. point of the compass (depending on the current direction of travel) is shown
Time on the top left-hand corner of the display.
The time, time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the changeover between The compass point display only operates when the ignition is switched on.
summer/winter times can be set here.
Winter tyres Service interval display
Here, the speed and the switching on and off of the acoustic signals when ex-
ceeding this speed can be adjusted. This function is, for example, used for win-  Introduction
ter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
speed of the vehicle » page 197.
Display in the MAXI DOT display 49
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the information display. Prompt in the segment display 49
Resetting the service interval display 50
Winter tyres max. speed ... km/h.
The service interval display shows the time and mileage to the next service
event. 

1) On models on which the speedometer indicates mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.

48 Operation
The service due date is automatically displayed on the display and this infor- Prompt in the segment display
mation can be displayed manually if necessary.
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or Fig. 30
days until the service due date is reached. Segment display: Example of a
The information regarding the service intervals can be found in the service message
schedule.

Note
Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle
battery is disconnected.

Display in the MAXI DOT display Explanation of graphic » Fig. 30

Oil change service  Service due
If an oil change service is due, the following message appears: Oil change in ... A Differentiating between types of service
km or ... days. B Days remaining until the next service interval

As soon as the service interval date has been reached, the message Oil C Kilometres remaining until the next service interval1)
change now! appears once the ignition has been switched on. Differentiating between types of service
Inspection The service type is determined by the number in position A » Fig. 30.
If an inspection is due, the following message appears: Inspection in ... km  Oil change service
or ... days.  Inspection
As soon as the service interval date has been reached, the message Inspec- Service due
tion now! appears once the ignition has been switched on. If a service becomes due, then the following information is displayed for about
10 seconds » Fig. 30.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service appoint- › The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A .
ment at any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Service › The symbol  and the number of days remaining until the next service inter-
val are displayed in position B .
menu item » page 47, Settings or from the Vehicle status in the main menu of
the MAXI DOTdisplay. » page 47, Main menu . › The symbol  and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position C .
The following message is displayed for 10 seconds.
As soon as the due date for the service has been reached, the flashing icon 
Oil change ... km / ... days and the message OIL CHNG or INSPEC_ appear in the display for about 20 sec-
Inspection ... km / ... days onds after the ignition has been switched on.
Display the days and distance until the next service
You can press button 3 » Fig. 21 on page 30 repeatedly to display the remain-
ing distance and time to until the next service whenever the ignition is switch-
ed on. 

1) The kilometres remaining until the next service are displayed instead of the odometer.

Information system 49
Information on the oil change service is displayed at first, followed by informa-
tion on the inspection when button 3 is pressed again.
Unlocking and opening
› The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A . Unlocking and locking
› The symbol  and the number of days remaining until the next service inter-
val are displayed in position B .
› The symbol  and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service  Introduction
interval are displayed in position C . This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle key 51
Resetting the service interval display
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key 52
We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage. Opening/closing a door 52
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In- Unlocking / locking - KESSY 53
correctly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehi- Information messages KESSY 53
cle. Safe securing 54
Individual settings 54
Variable service interval
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside 55
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display, the values of a new service interval are displayed, which are based Child safety lock 55
on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle. Your car is equipped with a central locking system.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors, the fuel fill-
conditions of the vehicle. er flap and luggage compartment lid at the same time based on the current
setting1).
The safe securing system » page 54 is integrated in the central locking sys-
tem. Once the car is locked from the outside, the door locks2) are automatically
blocked by the safe securing system » .
The following is true after unlocking1)
› The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
› The interior light, which is switched by the door contact, illuminates.
› The safe securing system is switched off2).
› The warning icon in the driver door stops flashing.
› The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
The following is true after locking1)
› The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked.
› The interior light switched by the door contact goes off.
› The safe securing system is switched on . 2) 

1) Depending on the individual setting » page 54.

2) This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries.

50 Operation
› The warning light in the driver door begins flashing. Vehicle key
› The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Displaying an error Fig. 31
If the warning icon in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec- Remote control key
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.

WARNING
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. The children might,
 Read and observe on page 51 first.
for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The ve- Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle» Fig. 31.
hicle could then start to move – risk of injury and accidents! These individu-
als might also not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control
themselves. Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures! key. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.
■ If the car is locked from the outside and the safe lock system is switched The wireless key has a flip out key bit.
on, no one must be in the car, as it is then not possible to open either a
door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after repair or replace-
for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life. ment of the receiver unit. Only then can the remote control key be used again.

CAUTION
Note ■ Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
■ When leaving the vehicle, always check if it is locked. against moisture and severe shocks.
■ In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked ■ Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust,
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ig-
the vehicle. nition lock.
■ Upon failure of the central locking system the key can only be used to unlock ■ The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system
and lock the driver's door. The other doors and the boot lid can be emergency does react to the remote control at less than approx. 3 metres
opened or emergency released. away » page 215.
■ Emergency locking of the door » page 216. ■ When leaving the vehicle, always check if it is locked.
■ Emergency unlocking of the boot lid » page 217. ■ If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.

Note
Please contact a specialist garage if you lose a key as they can obtain a new
one for you.

Unlocking and opening 51

 Unlocking/locking with the remote control key Checking the battery condition
If the red warning light B » Fig. 32 does not flash when you press a button on
the remote control key the battery is dead. Replace the battery » page 215.
Fig. 32
Remote control key CAUTION
■ Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and
the vehicle is in your line of sight.
■ If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote con-
trol key.
■ Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal inter-
ference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same fre-
quency range.
 Read and observe on page 51 first.
Note
Function and description of the remote control key » Fig. 32 For vehicles with anti-theft alarm the acoustic signals can also be activated/
 Unlocking the vehicle deactivated by locking/unlocking » page 47.
 Locking the vehicle
 Unlocking the boot lid Opening/closing a door
A Button for the fold out / fold in of the key
B Warning light

Unlocking
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un-
locked.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safe lock system1)
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched on. This function is intended to
prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
The seat and mirror are adjusted after the vehicle is unlocked » page 84. Fig. 33 Door handle/door opening lever
Locking  Read and observe on page 51 first.
The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been
locked. Opening from the outside
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the › Unlock the vehicle.
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed. › Pull on door handle A » Fig. 33 on the door you wish to open.
The current position of the seat and mirror after the vehicle is Opening from the inside
locked » page 84. › Pull on door handle B of the door and push the door away from you. 

1) This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some countries.

52 Operation
Closing from the inside Unlocking the boot lid
› Grasp pull handle C and close the door. › Press the button in the handle of the boot lid » page 57.
WARNING If the vehicle is locked via the sensor B , it is not possible to unlock it again in
■ Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly the following 2 seconds via the sensor A - prevents accidental unlocking.
while the vehicle is being driven – there is a risk of death.
CAUTION
■ Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
sweep – there is a risk of injury.
■ Do not use objects which might prevent direct contact between the hand
■ An opened door can close spontaneously if there is a strong wind or the and the grip sensor.
■ Some types of gloves can impair the function of the grip sensor.
vehicle is on a slope – there is a risk of injury.
■ After leaving the car there is no automatic locking.
■ Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death!
■ The vehicle cannot be locked if the ignition has not been turned off.

Unlocking / locking - KESSY Information messages KESSY

Fig. 34
 Read and observe on page 51 first.
Sensors in the handle of the Key in the vehicle
front door The protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle unlocks the
vehicle automatically if the following condition is met.
 The vehicle, including the boot lit, has been locked.
The turn signal lights flash four times as confirmation that the vehicle has
been unlocked again.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
 Read and observe on page 51 first.
 Key in vehicle.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and  KEY IN VEHICLE
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key. An audible signal sounds additionally on vehicles which are fitted with the an-
Sensors in the handle of the front door » Fig. 34 ti-theft alarm system, .
A Unlocking sensor System fault
B Locking sensor If there is a fault in the system, the following message will appear in the dis-
play of the instrument cluster.
Unlocking  Keyless access system faulty.
› Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor A » Fig. 34 »  CHECK KEYLESS
with the whole palm of your hand.
Low voltage of the key battery
Locking
If the voltage of the battery in the remote control key is too low, the following
› Touch the sensor B » Fig. 34 with your fingers. message appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved  Change the key battery!
into the position P before unlocking.
 KEY BATTERY 

Unlocking and opening 53

Change the key battery » page 215! Note
This function applies only to vehicles with specific equipment or for some
Safe securing countries.
 Read and observe on page 51 first.
Individual settings
The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the out-
side. The vehicle cannot now be opened from the inside.
 Read and observe on page 51 first.

This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instru- The following central locking functions can be set via the MAXI DOT dis-
ment cluster after switching off the ignition. play » page 47, Settings.
 Check SAFELOCK! Owner's manual! Opening a single door
 CHECK DEADLOCK This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other
doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened
Switching off again.
The safe lock can be switched off in one of the following ways.
Unlocking a vehicle side door
› By locking twice within 2 seconds. This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side. The other
› By disabling the interior monitoring » page 56, Interior monitor and towing doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened
protection. again.
If the vehicle is locked and the SafeLock system is switched off, the door can
Automatic locking/unlocking
be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever.
All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km/h. The button in the handle
Switching on of the boot lid is deactivated.
The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again.
unlocked. In addition, it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by
Switch on display pressing the central locking button .
The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle.
it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals.
The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on
Switch off display the door opening lever.
The warning light in the driver door flashes fast for about 2 seconds, goes out
and starts to flash regularly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the SafeLock system activated, no one may remain
in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or open a
window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescu-
ers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!

54 Operation
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside Child safety lock

Fig. 35 Fig. 36
Central locking button Child safety lock: Left rear door

 Read and observe on page 51 first.  Read and observe on page 51 first.

If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, it can also be unlocked and The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
passenger door » Fig. 35 even without the ignition switched on. While a door is
You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
Switching on
Locking
› Press the button / » Fig. 35 press. › Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 36 (the
other way around on the right-hand door).
The symbol  in the button illuminates.
Switching off
Unlocking › Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the ar-
› Press the button / » Fig. 35 press. row » Fig. 36 (the other way around on the right-hand door).
The symbol  in the button goes out.
Anti-theft alarm system
The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking
button.  Introduction
› It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety
feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.). This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the Activating/deactivating 56
opening lever of the respective door.
Interior monitor and towing protection 56
› In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people
to the vehicle. trying to break into the vehicle.

WARNING The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to only as alarm).
■ Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life! Triggering the alarm
■ If the safe lock system is switched on » page 54, the door opening lever The alarm is triggered when the following unauthorized actions are carried out
and the central locking buttons do not operate. on the locked vehicle. 

Unlocking and opening 55

› Opening the bonnet. Note
› Opening the boot lid. ■ If the car is unlocked with the key in the driver door, insert the key into the
› Opening the doors. ignition and switch the ignition to deactivate the alarm system.
› Manipulation of the ignition lock. ■ You can switch the audible signalling of the activation of the warning system
› Towing the vehicle » page 56. on and off in the MAXI DOT display in the menu item ATA confirm » page 47.
› Movement in the vehicle » page 56.
› Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system. Interior monitor and towing protection
› Uncoupling the trailer » page 170, Attaching and detaching trailers.
If the driver's door of a vehicle with a remote control is unlocked and opened Fig. 37
by the lock cylinder, then the alarm is triggered. Button for interior monitor and
Switching off the alarm towing protection
The alarm is turned off by pressing the  button on the radio remote control
key or switching on the ignition.

CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors
and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of
the anti-theft alarm system.  Read and observe on page 56 first.
Note The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the
The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years. alarm.
The tow-away protection triggers the alarm if a vehicle is registered as being
Activating/deactivating on an inclination.
 Read and observe on page 56 first. Activating
The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically af-
Activating
ter the vehicle is locked.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 sec-
onds after the vehicle is locked. Deactivating
If the vehicle is unlocked and a door or the boot lid not opened within the next › Switch off the ignition.
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the SafeLock system › Open the driver door.
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched back on. This function is intended › Press the symbol button  » Fig. 37 on the B-column on the driver's side.
to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally. The symbol lighting in the button changes  from red to orange.
Deactivating › Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is
Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibili-
unlocked. If the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds, the anti-theft alarm
ty of the alarm being triggered by movements (e.g. by children or animals)
system is automatically activated again.
within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train
The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the or ship) or towed. 
key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.

56 Operation
 CAUTION Note
■ The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the ■ The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated
interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the when starting off or at a speed of 5 km/hour or more for vehicles with central
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi- locking. The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is
cle. opened.
■ The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked, even if ■ Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure
the SafeLock system is deactivated. The interior monitor is however not acti- of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twin-
vated. door system.

Luggage compartment lid Twindoor - open/close small boot lid

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Twindoor - open/close small boot lid 57
TwinDoor - open / close large boot 58
Open / close (Superb Combi) 58
Delayed locking of the boot lid 58
WARNING
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise, the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the Fig. 38 Handle of boot lid/opened small boot lid
lid was locked – risk of accident!
■ Never drive with the luggage compartment lid open or ajar, as otherwise
 Read and observe and on page 57 first.
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning! After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the
■ Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, as otherwise
handle above the number plate.
this could crack – there is a risk of injury.
■ Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed - Opening
there is danger of injury! › Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid 1 » Fig. 38
and lift the boot lid.
CAUTION Closing
If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed, the lid is immediately › Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 2 » Fig. 38.
locked automatically when closed » page 58.
The small boot lid can also be opened by pressing the symbol  button on the
remote control key » page 52.

Unlocking and opening 57

TwinDoor - open / close large boot Fig. 41
Handle in the inner panelling of
the boot lid

 Read and observe and on page 57 first.

Fig. 39 Handle of boot lid / opened large boot lid After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the
handle above the number plate.
 Read and observe and on page 57 first. Opening
After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the › Press the handle A » Fig. 40 and raise the lid in the direction of the arrow
B.
handle above the number plate.
Opening Closing
› Press the button in the handle at the lower edge of the boot lid 1 » Fig. 39. › Pull the lid down with the handle C » Fig. 41 and close with a slight swing.
› Wait until the brake light 2 in the rear window flashes twice and then lift
the lid. Delayed locking of the boot lid
Closing  Read and observe and on page 57 first.
› Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 3 » Fig. 39. If the boot lid is unlocked with the symbol button  on the remote control
key, then the door is automatically locked after closing.
Open / close (Superb Combi)
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
After activation of delayed locking, the boot lid can be opened again after clos-
ing within a limited period.
Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time.

CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically. We therefore recommend locking the vehicle with the symbol
button  on the remote control key.
Fig. 40 Boot lid handle/opening the boot lid

58 Operation
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi) CAUTION
■ Before opening or closing the lid, check if there are any objects in the open-
 Introduction ing or closing range which could obstruct the movement (e.g. a load on the
roof rack or on the trailer, etc.) – risk of causing damage to the lid!
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened lid (e.g. dis-
Operating description 59 tance from the garage ceiling). Otherwise, it may happen that the clearance
Acoustic signals 61 above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load
Adjusting/deleting the top lid position 61 (e.g. after unloading) – risk of causing damage to the lid.
■ In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g. by a thick layer of snow), the
Malfunctions 61
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the load on the lid to re-
Force limiter enable the electrical operation.
The electric luggage compartment lid (hereinafter referred to only as a lid) is ■ If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an inter-
equipped with a force limiter. If the lid hits an obstacle when closing, it stops mittent beep.
and an audible signal sounds. ■ The flap is always to be close before disconnecting the battery.

If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the
boot lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid Operating description
can be interrupted.
Manual operation
Manually opening and closing the lid is only possible in exceptional cases. It
must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the
centre of the lid as possible » .

WARNING
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
■ Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases Fig. 42 Operation of the lid 
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!

CAUTION
■ The movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick
force against the lid.
■ Do not attempt to close the door manually during electrical closing process -
there is a risk of damaging the system of an electric valve operation.
■ If the lid is closed manually, it must be ensured that when moving the lid into
the lock, pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the ŠKODA
logo. Handling the sides of the lid can damage the electric lid.

Unlocking and opening 59

 Lid operation with the handle A
Closed Range » Fig. 43 Open
Action
Lid 1 2 3 Lid
Opening     
Stop     
Closing     
The operation of the lid using the handle A is only possible when the vehicle
is unlocked.
Fig. 43 Button for the flap operation / operation areas Lid operation with the button B
Closed Range Open
Action
 Read and observe and on page 59 first. Lid 1 2 3 Lid

Control elements Opening     

The lid can be operated with the following control elements. Stop     
› With the symbol button  on the remote control key (press for about 1 s). Closing     
› With the button in the handle A on the outer part of the lid » Fig. 42.
› With the button B on the inner part of the lid » Fig. 42. Operating the lid with the button B is only possible when the lid is open.
› With the button C in the centre console » Fig. 43. Lid operation with the symbol button  on the remote control key and the
Operating areas button C
The system distinguishes 3 operating areas where the function of the individu- Closed Range Open
al operating elements changes » Fig. 43. The end positions of the lid - fully Action
Lid 1 2 3 Lid
closed in the secured lock and fully opened - differ as well.
Opening     
The range of the area 3 changes depending on the setting of the top position Stop     
of the lid » page 61.
Closing     
If the lid is set in the uppermost position in the area 2 , the area 3 is not ac-
tive. The range of the area 2 changes depending on the setting of the top po- When the ignition is switched on, the operation of the lid does not function us-
sition of the lid. ing the remote control key.

Symbol explanation in the operating description Operating the lid with the button C does not work if the vehicle was locked
from the outside.
 Feasible action
 Non-feasible action Operating the lid with the symbol button  on the remote control key and the
button C does not work when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle.
 Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement

60 Operation
Acoustic signals Malfunctions
 Read and observe and on page 59 first.  Read and observe and on page 59 first.

The acoustic signals serve as a safety function and provide information about If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the lid is open, it is nec-
the success of a performed action. essary to activate the system of the electric boot lid.
Signals Meaning Activation means closing the lid by hand. Thus, the end position of the lid is
stored under fully closed in secured lock.
Open (using the button  on the remote control key
or the button C » Fig. 43 on page 60 ) Examples of operational malfunctions
Interrupted tone Description of the malfunc-
Automatic closing of the lid » page 59, in section In- Possible solutions
tion
troduction
The lid cannot be lifted out
1 continuous tone Force limiter Emergency unlocking of the lid » page 217
of the lock
3 rising tones Confirmation of the storage of the lid position Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), re-
3 identical tones fault The lid does not react to an opening the lid » page 59
opening signal
Adjusting/deleting the top lid position Press handle A and pull the lid upwards
The lid remains in the top
 Read and observe and on page 59 first. position
Manual closing of the lid

Adjusting
› Stop the lid in the desired position (electrically or manually). Electrical power windows
› Press and hold the button B » Fig. 42 on page 59 for longer than 3 seconds.
Storing the new position is confirmed with an audible signal.
 Introduction

Delete This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

› Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position. Opening/closing the window from the driver seat 62
› Press and hold the button B » Fig. 42 on page 59 for longer than 3 seconds. Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors 63
An audible signal sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted Force limit 63
from the memory, while the basic position of the top lid position is again set. Window convenience operation 63
Operational faults 64 
The top lid position is adjusted, for example, in the following situations.
› When the space for opening the lid is limited (e.g. garage height).
› For a more convenient operation, such as by a person's height.
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is
opened manually.
The lid always opens to the height which was last stored.

Unlocking and opening 61

 WARNING Note
■ Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking the vehi- ■ After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the win-
cle. In an emergency, the windows will no longer be able to be opened from dows for approx. 10 minutes. After the driver's or front passenger's door has
the inside. been opened, the windows can only be operated by using button A » Fig. 44
■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 63. If there is an obsta- on page 62.
cle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several ■ When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventila-
centimetres. The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of tion system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are
injury. opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the
■ Deactivating the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors is wind noise is more at certain speeds.
recommended (safety push button) S when children are being transported ■ The window lift system is equipped with protection against overheating. Re-
in the rear seats » Fig. 44 on page 62. peated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to over-
heat. If this happens, it will not be possible to operate the window for a short
CAUTION time. You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating
■ Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric protection has cooled down.
windows.
■ In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all eliminate the Opening/closing the window from the driver seat
ice » page 179, Windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the elec-
trical power windows. Otherwise, the window sealing and the electrical power Fig. 44
window mechanism could be damaged. Buttons on the driver's door
■ In the winter, ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause
there to be more resistance when closing the window. The window will stop
and move back several centimetres.
■ It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the win-
dow » page 63.
■ Always make sure that the windows are closed when you leave the locked
vehicle.

For the sake of the environment  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
At high speeds, you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily Power window buttons » Fig. 44
high fuel consumption.
A Button for electrical power window of the driver's door
B Button for electrical power window of the front passenger door
C Button for electrical power window of the rear right door
D Button for electrical power window of the rear left door
S Safety pushbutton

Opening
› Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes the window to
stop immediately. 

62 Operation
The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the
button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window button as far as the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately. to stop immediately.
Closing Closing
› Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the › Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the
window has moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes window has moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes
the window to stop immediately. the window to stop immediately.
The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to
the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi- the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi-
ately. ately.
Safety pushbutton
The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by press- Force limit
ing the safety switch S » Fig. 44. The buttons for the electrical power win-  Read and observe and on page 62 first.
dows at the rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety push button
S again. The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter. It reduces
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the warning light  in the the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
safety switch S illuminates. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-
doors onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
Fig. 45 If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
Button in the rear door ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again
within the next 10 seconds - the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
 Read and observe and on page 62 first.
Window convenience operation
There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that
window.  Read and observe and on page 62 first.

Opening The convenience operation of the windows offers the possibility of opening or
› Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has closing all the windows at once.
moved into the desired position. Releasing the button causes the window to
Convenience operation can take place in one of the following ways. 
stop immediately.

Unlocking and opening 63

Opening Electric sliding/tilting roof
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the remote control key.
› Hold the key in the driver's lock in the unlock position.  Introduction
› Press and hold the upper part of the central locking button in the driver's
door » page 55. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Hold button A » Fig. 44 on page 62 in the opening position. Operation 64
Closing Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof 65
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the remote control key. Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells 65
› Hold the key in the driver's lock in the lock position. The electric sliding/tilting roof (abbreviated in the following as 'sliding/tilting
› Press and hold the lower part of the central locking button » page 55 in the roof') can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the out-
driver's door.
door temperature is higher than -20 °C.
› Hold button A » Fig. 44 on page 62 in the closing position.
› In the KESSY system, hold a finger on the sensor B » Fig. 34 on page 53. The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the
door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
menu item Window op. . » page 47.
The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly CAUTION
is the automatic opening/closing of all windows is operational. ■ Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
■ If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's lock
sliding/tilting roof does not operate correctly. In this case, turn the rotary
is only possible within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle.
switch to the switch position A » Fig. 46 on page 64 and push forward for
The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the key or the re- about 10 seconds.
spective button is released.
Operation
Operational faults
 Read and observe and on page 62 first. Fig. 46
Control dial for the sliding/tilting
The automatic power windows do not work if the vehicle battery has been dis- roof
connected and connected again while a window was open. The system must
be activated.
Activation sequence:
› Switch on the ignition.
› Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
› Release the button.  Read and observe on page 64 first.
› Drag and drop the button upwards again and hold for about 1 s.
Comfort position
› Turn the switch to position C » Fig. 46.
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the
wind noise is reduced. 

64 Operation
Open partially By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor B when using the
› Simply turn the knob to a point between A and C. KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted.
Open fully WARNING
› Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury. The force limiter does
position). not operate with the convenience closing.
Tilting roof
› Turn the switch to position D . Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells
Closing
 Read and observe on page 64 first.
› Turn the switch to position A .
Sun screen If there is sufficient bright sunlight, the solar cells in the sliding/tilting roof de-
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the tilt/slide sunroof slides liver the electrical power for the fresh air blower. Further informa-
open. When the tilt/slide sunroof is closed the sun screen can be manually op- tion » page 115, Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system).
erated » . The operation of the sliding/tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a nor-
mal sliding/tilting roof.
Force limiter
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) pre-
vents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. The sliding/ Panoramic sliding/tilting roof (Superb Estate)
tilting roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by pushing the
switch in position A » Fig. 46 forwards until the sliding/tilting roof is com-  Introduction
pletely closed.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
WARNING Operation 66
When operating the tilt/slide sunroof and the sunshade, proceed with cau- Opening/closing the sun screen 66
tion to avoid causing crushing injuries – risk of injury! Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof 67
The panoramic sliding/tilting roof (abbreviated in the following as 'sliding/tilt-
CAUTION
ing roof') can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin- outdoor temperature is higher than -20 °C.
ity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism. The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. However, as soon as the driver or front passenger's
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.

 Read and observe on page 64 first. CAUTION

■ Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
The sliding/tilting roof can be operated by locking/unlocking using the key or ■ If, for example, the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is pos-
using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor B » Fig. 34 on page 53. sible that the sliding/tilting roof does not operate correctly. Next, move the ro-
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the remote control key. tary switch into position A » Fig. 47 on page 66 , pull the recess firmly 

› In the KESSY system, hold a finger on the sensor B » Fig. 34 on page 53.

Unlocking and opening 65

downwards and hold forwards firmly. The sliding/tilting roof opens and closes Force limiter
again after around 10 seconds. Do not release the control dial until it has done The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. The sliding/tilting roof
so. stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because
■ If, for example, the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is pos- there is something in the way (e.g. ice). The sliding/tilting roof can be fully
sible that the sun screen does not operate correctly. Then turn the switch to closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess E down
position A » Fig. 47 on page 66and press and hold the button G » Fig. 48 on and then pushing it forward until the sliding/tilting roof is fully closed » .
page 66. The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds. Do
not release the control dial until it has done so. WARNING
When operating the sliding/tilting roof, proceed with caution to avoid caus-
Operation ing crushing injuries – risk of injury!

Fig. 47 CAUTION
Control dial for the sliding/tilting During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin-
roof ity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the
opening mechanism.

Opening/closing the sun screen

Fig. 48
Buttons for sun screen
 Read and observe on page 65 first.

Comfort position
› Turn the switch to position C » Fig. 47.
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the
wind noise is reduced.
Open partially
› Turn the switch to a position in area D .  Read and observe on page 65 first.

Open fully The sun screen can be closed or opened using the buttons » Fig. 48.
› Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned Opening
position). › Briefly press the button F » Fig. 48 to open fully.
Tilting roof › Press and hold the button F to open to the desired position.
› Turn the switch to position A . The opening process stops when one releases the button.
› Press the switch in the region E towards the roof.
Closing
Closing › Briefly press the button G » Fig. 48 to close fully.
› Turn the switch to position A . › Press and hold the button G to close in the desired position.
› Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards. The closing process stops when one releases the button. 

66 Operation
 WARNING
Lights and visibility
When operating the sunshade, proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury! Lights

Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof  Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Read and observe on page 65 first.
Operating the lights and the instrument illumination 68
The sliding / tilting roof can be operated by locking or unlocking using the key Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT) 69
or using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor A or B » Fig. 34 on
Turn signal and main beam 69
page 53.
Automatic driving lamp control 70
Closing Adaptive headlights (AHL) 70
› Press  and hold the symbol button on the key or hold the key in the locking Fog lights 71
cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position, or for the KESSY system, Fog lights with the CORNER function 71
keep your finger on the sensor B » Fig. 34 on page 53 » .
Rear fog light 71
By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor B when using the COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 72
KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted. Hazard warning light system 72
Tilting roof Parking lights 73
› Press and hold the symbol button  on the remote control key. Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is on.
WARNING The arrangement of the controls right-hand drive models may differ from the
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully – risk of injury. The force limiter does layout shown in » Fig. 49 on page 68. The symbols which mark the positions
not operate with the convenience closing. of the controls are identical.
Keep the headlights lenses clean. The following guidelines must be ob-
served » page 179, Headlight lenses.

WARNING
■ The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with
national legal requirements.
■ The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the
lights. 

Lights and visibility 67

 WARNING (Continued) Pull switch
■ The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and  Switch on the front fog lamp » page 71
does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the lights and, if  Switching on the rear fog light » page 71
necessary, to switch on the light depending on the prevailing light condi-
tions. The light sensor cannot, for example, detect rain or snow. Under  Headlight range control
these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights!
■ Never drive with only the side lights on! The side lights are not bright 
Turning the dial B » Fig. 49 from the position to  gradually adjusts the
enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by oth- headlight range control and thereby shortens the light cone.
er oncoming traffic. Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol-
dark or if visibility is poor. lowing car load.
 Front seats occupied, boot empty
Note
 All seats occupied, boot empty
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the driving lights are switched
 All seats occupied, boot loaded
on, the light outlet areas are free from condensation after a short time, al-
though the headlight lenses may still be misted up around the edge. This mist  Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
has no influence on the life of the lighting system. We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched
on.
Operating the lights and the instrument illumination
 Instrument lighting
Turning the rotary switch C » Fig. 49 when the lights are switched on adjusts
Fig. 49 the brightness of the instrument lighting » Fig. 49.
Light switches, knobs for head-
light beam adjustment and The instruments are also illuminated when the parking light, low or high beam
brightness of instrument illumi- light is switched on.
nation Bi-Xenon headlights
The Bi-Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the
vehicle when the ignition is switched on and when driving. Vehicles that are
equipped with Bi-Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range ad-
justment control.
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
WARNING
Switching lights on and off Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions.
Depending on the equipment configuration, the light switch A » Fig. 49 can be ■ The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
moved to the following positions. cles.
■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Turn switch
 Switching off lights (except daytime running lights) Note
 Automatic switching lights on and off » page 70 ■ The light switch is in position  or  and the ignition is turned off, the low
 Switching on the parking light or parking lights » page 73 beam is switched off automatically and the status light is lit. The parking light
 Switch on low beam goes out after the ignition key is removed.
■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam illuminates automatically.

68 Operation
Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT) Turn signal and main beam
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
Fig. 50
The daytime running lights (hereafter only function) provide lighting for the Operating lever: Turn signal and
front of the vehicle. main beam operation
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
 The light switch is in the position  or  » Fig. 49 on page 68.
 The ignition is switched on.
 The parking aid is activated.
Deactivating the function
 Read and observe on page 67 first.
› Switch off the ignition.
› Pull the turn signal- and main beam lever (» Fig. 50 on page 69) towards Lever positions » Fig. 50
the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position. A Switch on right turn signal
› Switch on the ignition. B Switch on left turn signal
› Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the
ignition. C Switch on high beam (spring-loaded position)
D Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded
Activating the function position)
› Switch off the ignition.
› Pull the turning signal and main beam lever towards the steering wheel, Main beam
push it up and hold it in this position. The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
› Switch on the ignition. The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the high beam
› Hold the lever in this position for at least 3 seconds after switching on the is switched on.
ignition.
Flasher
On vehicles with MAXI DOT display, the function can be enabled or disabled in The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off.
the menu item Dayl. dri. light » page 47 .
The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the headlight
WARNING flasher is switched on.
When the daytime running light is switched on, the parking lights (neither Flashing
at the front nor the rear) and the number plate lights are not lit. Therefore When the left turn signal switch is switched on, the indicator light  flashes in
always switch on the low beam when the visibility is poor. the instrument cluster.
When the right turn signal switch is switched on, the indicator light  flashes
in the instrument cluster.
The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a
curve or after making a turn.
The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal
light fails. 

Lights and visibility 69

“Convenience turn signal” CAUTION
If you wish to flash three times only, briefly push the stalk to the upper or low- Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the
er pressure point and release again. windscreen. This can impair its function or reliability.
The “Lane ch. flash” can be activated or deactivated via the MAXI DOT display
in the Lane ch. flash» page 47 menu item. Adaptive headlights (AHL)
WARNING  Read and observe on page 67 first.
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
The AHL system makes sure the street remains lit up depending on the traffic
not be dazzled.
and weather situation.
The AHL system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle
Automatic driving lamp control to the driving speed or the use of the wiper.
The AHL system works as long as the light switch is in position  .» page 70
Fig. 51
Light switch: AUTO position The AHL system operates in the following modes.
Out of town mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam.
City mode
The light cone in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that this and the adjacent
pavements, intersections, pedestrian crossings, etc. are illuminated. The mode
is active at speeds of 15 - 50 km / h.
 Read and observe on page 67 first. Motorway mode
The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re-
If the light switch is in position  » Fig. 51, the parking lights, low beam and spond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time. The mode activates
number plate lights are switched on or off automatically. progressively from a speed of 90 km / h onward. It is most efficient at a speeds
The light on/off switching is controlled by a sensor mounted under the wind- above 120 km / h.
screen in the holder of the inside mirror.
Rain mode
If the light switch is in position , the lettering  illuminates next to the The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can re-
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol  next to the duce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain.
light switch also illuminates.
The mode is active at speeds of 15 – 70 km/h and if the windscreen wipers
Automatic driving-light control during rain continuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes. The mode is
The low beam lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions deactivated when the windscreen wipers are switched off for longer than 8
are met. minutes.
 The light switch is in position  » Fig. 51. Dynamic cornering lights
 Automatic wiping with rain - position 1 or wiping - position 2 or 3 is The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so
turned on » page 78, Windscreen wipers and washers. that the road in the curve is illuminated. This function is active at speeds
 The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s. greater than 10 km.h and in all AHL modes. 

The light turns off about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.

70 Operation
Tourist lights (Travel mode) The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the fog lights
This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system are switched on » page 34.
(driving on the left/right) without dazzling the oncoming vehicles.
When this mode is active, the above mentioned modes and the side swivel of Fog lights with the CORNER function
the headlights are deactivated.  Read and observe on page 67 first.
This mode can be enabled or disabled via the MAXI DOT display in the Travel
mode» page 48, Lights and visibility menu option. The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on the relevant side of the ve-
hicle to illuminate the area around the vehicle when turning, parking, etc.
WARNING The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions
If the AHL system is defective, the headlights are automatically lowered to are met.
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Drive carefully  The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to
and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible. the right or left1).
 The engine is running.
Note  The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km/h.
When the “tourist light” mode is active, the warning light  flashes for 10 sec-  The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and
onds each time the ignition is switched on. the low beam is switched on.
 The daytime running lights are not switched on.
Fog lights  The fog lights are not switched on.

Note
Fig. 52
Light switch: Turn on front and The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
rear fog light
Rear fog light
 Read and observe on page 67 first.

Switching on/off
› Turn the light switch to position  or  » Fig. 52 on page 71.
› Pull the light switch to position 2 .
 Read and observe on page 67 first. The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence.
Switching on/off The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the rear fog
› Turn the light switch to position  or  » Fig. 52. light is switched on » page 34.
› Pull the light switch to position 1 . When in reverse gear only the rear fog lamp illuminates on the driver's side. 
The fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence.

1) If both switch on conditions are conflicting, for example, if the front wheels are turned to the left and
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.

Lights and visibility 71

Only the rear fog light on the trailer illuminates if the vehicle has a factory fit- The light turns off after 10 seconds or after a pre-set time or after the vehicle
ted towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and it is is locked.
driven with a trailer.
Activate/deactivate the function
The functions and settings of the illumination time can be activated/deactiva-
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME ted via the MAXI DOT display in the menu items Coming Home or Leaving
 Read and observe on page 67 first. Home » page 47.

COMING HOME (hereinafter referred to only as function) switches the light au- CAUTION
tomatically for a short time after leaving the vehicle. ■ Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on
the windscreen. This can impair its function or reliability.
LEAVING HOME (hereinafter referred to only as function) switches the light au- ■ If this function is activated constantly, the battery will be heavily discharged
tomatically for a short time when approaching the vehicle.
particularly in short-haul travel.
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
 The light switch is in position  » Fig. 51 on page 70. Hazard warning light system
 The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced.
 The ignition is switched off. Fig. 53
Button for hazard warning light
 The parking aid is activated.
system
 The function is switched on (the driver's door is opened / the car is un-
locked with the remote control).
The function switches on the following light, depending on the equipment
fitted.
› Parking lights
› Low beam
› Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors  Read and observe on page 67 first.
› Licence plate light
Switching on/off
Poorer visibility is evaluated by sensor mounted in the holder of the interior
mirror.
› Press the  » Fig. 53 button.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
COMING HOME
warning light system is switched on. The warning light for the turn signals and
The light turns on automatically when you open the driver's door on (within 60
the warning light in the button also flash at the same time. The hazard warn-
seconds of turning off the ignition).
ing light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off.
The light turns off 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid or af-
The hazard warning light system will switch on automatically if one of the air-
ter the pre-set time has expired.
bags is deployed.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out after 60 seconds.
If the turn signal light is switched on when the hazard warning light and the
LEAVING HOME ignition are both switched on, then only the turn signal light on the corre-
The light turns on automatically after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote sponding vehicle side will flash. 
control.

72 Operation
 WARNING Front door warning light 74
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example, the following oc- Entry lighting 75
curs.
Note
■ You encounter a traffic jam.
■ The vehicle has broken down. With the ignition off, the light turns off automatically after about 10 minutes.

Front interior light

Parking lights
 Read and observe on page 67 first.

The parking light is designed for temporary lighting of the parked vehicle.
Switching on the parking light 
› Switch off the ignition.
› Place the control lever into position A or B as far as it can go » Fig. 50 on
page 69 - the parking light on the right/left-hand side of the vehicle is
switched on.
If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is
switched off, the parking light  is not automatically switched on. Fig. 54 Operation of the front interior light: Version 1/version 2

Switching on the side lights on both sides  Rocker switch positions » Fig. 54
› Switch off the ignition.  Switching on
› Turn the light switch A to position  » Fig. 49 on page 68 and lock the ve-  Switching off
hicle.
 Control with the door contact switch (middle position)
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the au- There is no icon available for the center position (operation with the door con-
dible alarm is turned off, but the parking lights will remain switched on. tact switch) in Version 2.
Switch for reading lights
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded, especially  Switching left reading lamp on/off
over short distances.  Switching right reading lamp on/off
Conditions for operation of light with the door contact switch - setting 
Interior lights The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
› The vehicle is unlocked.
 Introduction › One of the doors or the luggage compartment lid is being opened.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› The ignition key is removed.
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
Front interior light 73
Rear interior light - Variant 1 74
› The vehicle is locked.
› The ignition is switched on.
Rear interior light - Variant 2 74 › About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed. 

Lights and visibility 73

 Note Rear interior light - Variant 2
Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting that illuminates
the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel. These are switched on Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof.
automatically when the parking light is activated. Also, after switching on the
ignition when the parking lights are switched on, the door handle lighting illu- Fig. 56
minates. Interior lights at the rear

Rear interior light - Variant 1

Applies to vehicles without a panoramic sliding roof.

Fig. 55
Interior light and rear reading
lights The light is operated by moving the lens into one of the following posi-
tions » Fig. 56.
 Switching on
 Control with the door contact switch (middle position)1)
 Switching off

Switch for reading lights » Fig. 55 Front door warning light

 Switching left reading lamp on/off
Fig. 57
 Switching right reading lamp on/off
Warning light
The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior
light » page 73.

The warning light » Fig. 57 turns on when the front door is opened.
The warning light turns off when the front door is closed.
In vehicles without a warning light only a reflector is installed at this point. 

1) In this position, apply the same rules to the rear interior light as for the front interior light » page 73 .

74 Operation
 Note Windscreen and rear window heater
If the door is open and the ignition switched off, the light extinguishes auto-
matically after around 20 minutes.

Entry lighting
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and illumi-
nates the entry area of the front door.
The light illuminates after the vehicle has been unlocked or on opening the
front door. The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed
or if the ignition is switched on.

WARNING Fig. 58 Buttons for the rear and front window heating Climatronic / man-
If the entry light is on, do not touch its cover – risk of burns! ual air conditioning

Note Buttons for the heating in the centre console » Fig. 58

If the door is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish auto-  Switching the rear window heater on/off
matically after around 1 minute.  Switching the windscreen heater on/off
When the heater is switched on, a lamp illuminates inside the button.
Visibility The heater only works when the engine is running.
 Introduction The heater automatically switches off after approximately 10 minutes.

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: For the sake of the environment
Windscreen and rear window heater 75 The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de-iced or free
Sun visors 76 from mist. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on
fuel economy » page 151, Saving electrical energy.
Sun screen 76
Sun screen in the rear doors 76 Note
■ If the on-board voltage drops, the heater switches off automatically, in order
to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 197, Auto-
matic load deactivation.
■ If the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery.

Lights and visibility 75

Sun visors Sun screen

Fig. 61
Unroll the sun screen

Fig. 59 Sun visor: fold down / pivot to door The sun screen is located in the lower part of the boot cover.
Extending
› Pull the sun screen on the handle A » Fig. 61 and hang it in the magnetic
brackets B .
Retracting
› Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets B and hold it on the
handle A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the boot cover
without being damaged.
Note
Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields
(watches, electronics, etc.) in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets.
Fig. 60 Sun visor: Auxiliary panel fold down / makeup mirror They can be damaged by the magnetic field.

Sun visors » Fig. 59, » Fig. 60 Sun screen in the rear doors
1 Fold down the cover
2 Swivel cover towards the door Fig. 62
3 Fold down the auxiliary cover Rear door: Sun screen
A Make up mirror, the cover can be pushed in the direction of the arrow
B Light - turns on automatically when the cover slides open

While sliding the cover A or when lifting the cover, the light turns off B.

WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de-
ployment area of the head airbags if any objects are attached to them. Ini- Extending
tiation of the head airbags may cause injury. › Pull out the sun screen with the handle A » Fig. 62 and hang it in the brack-
et on the top edge of the door. 

76 Operation
Retracting CAUTION
› Remove the sun screen from the handle A » Fig. 62 and hold it in such a ■ If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on,
way that it can roll up slowly without being damaged. the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the igni-
tion is turned back on. The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold tempera-
Windscreen wipers and washers tures between the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned
back on again.
 Introduction ■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before the journey or be-
fore switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: windscreen. If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are fro-
Windscreen wipers and washers 78 zen to the windscreen, this may damage both the blades and windscreen wip-
Headlight cleaning system 79 er motor!
■ Carefully release frozen wiper blades off the windscreen.
The wiper and washer system provide a good view through the windscreen or ■ Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving.
rear window. ■ If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is the windscreen.
switched on and the bonnet is closed. ■ Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted. The wiper
arms could damage the paint of the bonnet.
Top up with windscreen wiper fluid » page 188. ■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
obstacle. The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the ob-
WARNING
stacle, in order to avoid damage to the wiper. Remove the obstacle and switch
■ Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi- the wiper on again.
bility and safe driving » page 219.
■ Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea- Note
sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner. ■ Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the
■ Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rub-
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other- bers.
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front. ■ The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed.
■ Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is still responsi- ■ The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen
ble for setting the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending cleaner to avoid any smears. The wiper blades should be cleaned with a
on the visibility conditions. sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues, for example.
■ Keep the wiper blades clean. They may become soiled, e.g., with wax resi-
dues after washing in automatic car wash systems » page 177.
■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en-
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx. +10 °C.

Lights and visibility 77

Windscreen wipers and washers Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to
stop and the wipers to continue for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on
the spraying duration).
Fig. 63
Operating lever: Windscreen At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
wipers and washer settings the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window  (Superb Combi)
The wash system operates immediately, the wiper wipes somewhat later.
Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to
stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 to 3 wiper strokes (depending on
the spraying duration). The operating lever remains in position » Fig. 63 6 .
 Read and observe and on page 77 first.
Automatic rear window wiper (Superb Combi)
Lever positions If the lever is in position 2 » Fig. 63 or 3 the rear window is wiped every
0  Wipers off 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h.
1  Periodic windscreen wiping / automatic wiping in rain If automatic windscreen wiping in rain is activated (the operating lever is in the
2  Slow windscreen wiping position 1 ) the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in
continuous mode (no break between each wiping process).
3  Rapid windscreen wiping
4  Flick windscreen wiping, service position of the wiper Automatic rear window wiping can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT
arms » page 219, (spring-loaded position) display in the menu item Rear wiper » page 47.
5  Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen (spring-loaded position) Winter setting of the windscreen wiper
6  Wiping the rear window (the windscreen wiper wipes at regular in- If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
tervals after a few seconds) the windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wip-
7  Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window (spring-loaded position) ers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.
A  Switches for setting: the desired pause between the individual wip- › Switch on the windscreen wipers.
er strokes / the speed of the wiping in rain (operating lever in the › Switch off the ignition.
position 1 ) The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when
Interval windscreen wiping  switching off the ignition.
The wiping intervals are also speed-dependent regulated. The service position can also be used as a winter position » page 219.
Automatic windscreen wiping in rain  Note
The wiping intervals are controlled depending on the rain intensity.
■ If the operating lever is in the position 2 or 3 and the speed of the vehicle
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen  drops below 4 km/h, the wiping speed is switched to a lower wiping level. The
The wash system operates immediately, the windscreen wipers wipe some- original setting is restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle exceeds
what later. The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneous- 8 km/h.
ly at a speed of more than 120 km/h. ■ The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.

78 Operation
Headlight cleaning system WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain an electrolyte liquid which can
 Read and observe and on page 77 first. escape if mirror glass is broken.
■ The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory
After the ignition is switched on, the headlights are always cleaned at the first
system. Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle. If this is not
and after every tenth spray of the windscreen (setting 5 » Fig. 63 on
possible, at least open the window.
page 78), when the low beam or main beam is switched on. ■ If you swallow electrolytic fluid, seek medical assistance immediately.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight ■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. The following guide- ately wash the affected area for several minutes plenty of water. Then con-
lines must be observed » page 179, Headlight lenses. sult a doctor immediately.
To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter, any
snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be Interior mirror
cleared with a de-icing spray.

CAUTION
Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand – there
is risk of damage.

Rear mirror

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Interior mirror 79 Fig. 64 Interior mirror: manual dimming / auto-dimming / light sensor
Exterior mirrors 80
 Read and observe on page 79 first.
WARNING
■ Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice, snow, condensation or Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 64
other objects. 1 Basic position of the mirror
■ Convex (curved outward) or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of 2 Mirror dimming
vision. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These Mirror with automatic dimming » Fig. 64
mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the fol-
lowing vehicles. A Warning light - lights when dimming is activated
■ Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to B Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming
the following vehicles. C Light sensor
D Light sensor on the back of the mirror

Mirror with automatic dimming

If the automatic dimming is enabled, the mirror dims automatically depending
on the light falling on the sensors. 

Lights and visibility 79

When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the Adjust the position
mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed). The mirror can be adjusted to the desired position by moving the knob in the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 65.
Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicini-
ty of the automatic dimming interior mirror » . The movement of the mirror surface follows the movement of the rotary knob.

WARNING Synchronous adjustment of the mirror

The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to opera- › Activate the synchronous adjustment of the mirror above the MAXI DOT dis-
tional faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident. play in the menu item Mirror adjust. » page 47, Settings.
› Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror ad-
justment.
CAUTION
› Adjust the mirror to the desired position.
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the light striking the sen-
sors is not affected by other objects. Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob 
It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched
Note on and at a speed of up to 15 km/h.
If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off, the exterior mirror The mirrors are folded out into the driving position after the rotary knob is
dimming is also switched off. turned from the position  to a different one.

Exterior mirrors Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key
› Close all windows.
Fig. 65
› Press  on the remote control key for about 2 seconds.
Exterior mirror operation The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ignition is
switched on.
Mirror with automatic dimming
The exterior mirror blackout is controlled together with the automatic dimming
interior mirror » page 79.
Memory function for mirrors
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat.
 Read and observe on page 79 first. It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirrors when saving
the driver's seat position with » page 84, Memory function of the electrically
The knob can be moved into the following positions (depending on the vehi- adjustable seat or » page 84, Memory function of the remote control key.
cle equipment)
 Adjust the left mirror Fold in passenger's mirror
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat.
 Adjust the right mirror
 Switch off mirror control The passenger side mirror can tilt down to improve the view to the kerb when
 Mirror heater reversing. 

 Folding in the exterior mirrors

80 Operation
The mirror will be folded automatically if the following conditions are met.
Seats and practical features
 The function is activated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror
down » page 47, Settings. Adjusting the seats
 The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.  Introduction
 The reverse gear is engaged. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 The mirror setting was previously stored » page 84, Memory function of
the electrically adjustable seat or » page 84, Memory function of the re- Manually adjusting the front seats 82
mote control key. Electric front seat adjustment 82
Head restraints 83
WARNING Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat 84
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces if the exterior mirror heater is Memory function of the remote control key 84
switched on - risk of burns.
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.
CAUTION
■ The exterior mirrors with fold in function  never mechanically fold by hand - The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that
there is a risk of damaging the electric mirror actuator! the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent
■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma- arms.
noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following rea-
wait for a loud clapping noise. sons.
Note
› Reaching the controls safely and quickly.
› A relaxed and fatigue-free body position.
■ The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an › Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
outside temperature of +35 ℃. system.
■ If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by
hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface. WARNING
■ Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
■ The electric front seat adjustment is also functional when the ignition is
turned off (even with the ignition key removed). Therefore, when leaving
the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a danger of injury!
■ Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle.
■ Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de-
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seat) – risk of accident! 

Seats and practical features 81

 Note Electric front seat adjustment
■ After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of
the backrest angle.
■ For safety reasons, it is not possible to store the seat position in the electric
seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the
seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat cushion.
■ Each time you store the position of the electrically adjustable driver's seat
and exterior mirrors, the existing settings are deleted.

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 67 Adjusting controls / lumbar support

Fig. 66 Controls / setting

 Read and observe on page 81 first.

Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction Fig. 68 Setting: Seat pad / backrest

› Pull the lever A » Fig. 66 in the direction of the arrow 1 and push the seat in
the required direction.  Read and observe on page 81 first.
The lock must click into place after you release the lever.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
Adjusting height of seat › Push the switch B » Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 3 » Fig. 68.
› Again push/pull the lever B » Fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows2. Set the height of the seat cushion
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest › Push the switch B » Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 5 » Fig. 68.
› Relieve any pressure from the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the Adjust the angle of the seat cushion
handwheel C » Fig. 66 in the direction of the arrow 3.
› Push the switch B » Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 4 » Fig. 68.
Adjusting lumbar support
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
› Push the lever D » Fig. 66 in the direction of one of the arrows4. › Push the switch C » Fig. 67 in the direction of one of the arrows 6 » Fig. 68.
Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support
› Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows2 » Fig. 67. 

82 Operation
Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support › To move the head restraint downwards, press and hold the safety but-
› Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows1 » Fig. 67. ton » Fig. 69 -  with one hand and push the head restraint down with the
other hand.
The adjusted driver's seat position can be set in the memory of the
seat » page 84 or the remote control key » page 84. The head restraints and the front seats must be adjusted to match the body
size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide
Note the most effective levels of protection to the passengers » page 9, Correct and
If the setting procedure is interrupted, you will need to press the button again. safe seated position.
Removing/installing
Head restraints › Fold the seat slightly forward before removing the rear head restraint.
› Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
› Press the locking button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 69 -  and pull
the head restraint out.
› To reinsert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat back-
rest until the locking button clicks into place.
Removing and installing rear middle head rest
Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system.
› Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
› Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 70 simultaneously
press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flathead screwdriver
Fig. 69 Head restraints: Setting / removing with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head rest.
› To reinsert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat back-
rest until the locking button clicks into place.
Fig. 70
Rear centre head rests in vehi- WARNING
cles with the TOP TETHER sys- With seats occupied, the respective head rests must be installed and cor-
tem rectly set (may not be in the bottom position) - there is a risk of fatal injury!

Note
The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.

 Read and observe on page 81 first.

Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head rest is at the same level
as the upper part of your head.
Setting height
› Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as
required » Fig. 69 - .

Seats and practical features 83

Memory function of the electrically adjustable seat or
› Press and hold the desired memory button B with the ignition off or when
Fig. 71 the ignition is on and travelling at a speed of more than 5 km / h.
Memory buttons and SET button Stopping the ongoing adjustment
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the button  on the remote control
key.
Note
Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
you also have to restore the setting of the individual exterior mirror on the
passenger side for reversing.
 Read and observe on page 81 first.
Memory function of the remote control key
The memory function for the driver's seat provides the option to store the po-
sitions of the driver's seat and the external mirrors. Each of the three memory  Read and observe on page 81 first.
buttons B » Fig. 71 can be assigned a set position.
The automatic storage of the driver's seat and exterior mirror positions when
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward locking the vehicle can be turned on in the memory of the remote control key
› Switch on the ignition. (afterwards only as function of automatic storage).
› Adjust the seat to the desired position. Enable automatic storage
› Adjust both of the exterior mirrors » page 80. › Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
› Press the button SET A » Fig. 71. › Press and hold any memory button B » Fig. 71 on page 84.
› Within 10 seconds after pressing the SET button, press the desired memory › After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button, at the
button B .
same time press the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
An acknowledgement sound confirms the storage.
The successful activation of the automatic storage function for each key is
Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down The lowering func-
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
tion for the mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be ena-
bled » page 47. › Enable automatic storage. 

› Switch on the ignition.

› Press the required memory button B » Fig. 71.
› Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror adjustment » page 80.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position » page 80.
› Disengage reverse gear.
The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
Retrieving the saved setting
› Briefly press the desired memory button B » Fig. 71 with the ignition on.
84 Operation
When automatic storage is activated, the current positions of the driver's seat Convenience features of passenger seat 87
and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key Front armrest 87
each time the vehicle is locked. When the vehicle is next unlocked using the Rear armrest 87
same key, the driver's seat and the external mirrors assume the positions stor- Seat backrests 87
ed in the memory of this key1).
Rear seat folded forward (Superb Combi) 88
Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing
Above the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror down The lowering func- Seat heaters
tion for the mirror on the passenger side when reversing must be ena-
bled » page 47.
› Unlock the vehicle using the respective remote control key.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror adjustment » page 80.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position » page 80.
› Disengage reverse gear.
The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the remote control key
memory. Fig. 72 Heating: Front seats/ rear seats
Disable the function of automatic storage
The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key. can be heated electrically.
› Press and hold the SET button A » Fig. 71 on page 84. At the same time,
press the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds. The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running.
The successful deactivation of the automatic storage function for each key is Switching on the front seat heater
confirmed by an acoustic signal. › Press the controller in the area of the symbols  and  » Fig. 72 - 
Stopping the ongoing adjustment Switch on rear seat heater
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the button  on the remote control › Press the symbol button  or  » Fig. 72 - .
key.
By pressing the button once, the heating is switched to the highest intensity -
level 3, which is indicated by all three of the warning lights in the switch illumi-
Seat features nating.

 Introduction With repeated pressing of the switch, the heating is turned down until it goes
off.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The seat heating level is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights
Seat heaters 85 in the respective control. 
Ventilated front seats 86

1) The vehicle must be locked and unlocked with the same key to save the seat and exterior mirror position
to the key.

Seats and practical features 85

If the engine is switched off and then turned on again within 10 mins with the Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions and seat
rear seat heating switched, then each rear seat heating is automatically turned backrests on the front seats.
on again.
The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch » Fig. 73 in the front part of
WARNING the seat cushion, in front of the seat control elements for the electric front
seat adjustment.
If you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through
medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we rec- Switching on
ommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the back, › Switch the rocker switch to position 1 - lower intensity and to position 2 -
the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is higher intensity.
used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving
long distances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the jour- Switching off
ney. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition. › Switch the rocker switch to the centre position .
WARNING
CAUTION If you or a passenger have limited pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g.
■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them. caused by medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes),
■ The seat heater in the following cases will not turn on - there is a risk of we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated
damaging the seat covers and seat heater. front seat.
■ The seats are not occupied.
■ Items are fastened to or stored on the seats e.g. child seat, bags etc.
CAUTION
■ Additional seat covers or protective covers are fixed to the seats.
■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
■ Clean the seat covers » page 182, Seat covers.
■ The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion. Do not place any ob-

Note jects in this area - it may damage the fan.

■ Do not clean the seats using moisture. Clean the seat covers » page 182,
■ If the rear seat heating is set to the highest intensity - level 3, it is automati-
Seat covers.
cally switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes (two warning lights are illumina-
ted on the switch). Note
■ If the on-board voltage drops, the heater switches off automatically in order
■ The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running. This
to provide sufficient electrical power for the engine control » page 197.
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
■ We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the
Ventilated front seats same time. Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces
the heating capacity, at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit
Fig. 73 to detect the right seat surface temperature.
Rocker switch for the seat venti-
lation

86 Operation
Convenience features of passenger seat Note
Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand-
Fig. 74 brake.
Operating passenger seat from
the rear seat Rear armrest

Fig. 76
Fold the armrest forwards

The front passenger seat can also be operated from the rear seat.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
› Push the switch A in the direction of one of the arrows 1 » Fig. 74.

Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction Folding forward

› Push the switch B in the direction of one of the arrows 2 » Fig. 74 . › Fold down the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 76.
A cup holder may be located in the armrest » page 90.
Front armrest
Seat backrests
Fig. 75
Adjusting armrest

The armrest is adjustable for height and length.

Setting height Fig. 77 Pull seat back / seat belt to the side panel to unlock
› First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the
arrow 1 » Fig. 75 to one of the 4 fixed positions. The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backr-
ests forward. The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles
Move
with divided rear seats.
› Move the cover into the desired position in the direction of the arrow
2 » Fig. 75. Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests. 
The armrest includes a storage compartment underneath » page 92.

Seats and practical features 87

If the front seats are too far back, we recommend taking out the rear head re- CAUTION
straints before the seat backrests are folded forward, to achieve a loading ■ Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backr-
space that is as horizontal as possible » . ests. Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the fol-
Fold down split seat backrest ded back seat backrests.
› Press the release knob A » Fig. 77. ■ Store the head restraints that were removed in such a way that they are not

› Fold the seat backrest completely forwards. damaged or soiled.

Fold down undivided seat backrest Rear seat folded forward (Superb Combi)
› Push the release handles A » Fig. 77 on both sides of the seat backrest at
the same time.
Fig. 78
› Fold the seat backrest completely forwards. Folding the seat cushion for-
Fold back split seat backrest wards
› If you removed the head restraint, you need to reinsert it with the backrest
tilted slightly forwards » page 83.
› Hold the rear outer seat belt C » Fig. 77 against the side trim panel.
› Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing
knob A clicks into place – check by pulling on the seat backrest » .
› Make sure that the red pin B is hidden.
Fold back undivided seat backrest › Pull up the seat squab in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 78 and fold for-
› If you removed the head restraints, you need to reinsert them with the back- wards in the direction of the arrow 2 .
rest tilted slightly forwards » page 83.
Note
› Hold the rear outer seat belts C » Fig. 77 against the side trim panel. To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible, the rear head re-
› Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the release straints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards. Store the
levers A on either side of the seat back click into place – check by pulling on
the seat backrest » . removed head restraints in such a way that they are not damaged or soiled.
› Make sure that the red pins B on both sides of the seat back are not visible.
Practical features
WARNING
■ The seat belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after  Introduction
folding back the seat backrests – they must be ready to use.
■ The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob- This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart- Car park ticket holder 89
ment under sudden braking – risk of injury. Storage compartment on the driver's side 89
■ In occupied rear seats make sure that the respective seat backrests are
Storage compartments in the doors 90
properly engaged.
Storage compartment in the front centre console 90
Cup holders 90
Cigarette lighter 91
Ashtray 91
12 Volt power outlet 92 

88 Operation
Storage compartment under the front armrest 92  Read and observe on page 89 first.
Storage net in front centre console 93
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching car park tickets.
Glasses storage box 93
Storage compartment on passenger side 94 WARNING
Storage compartment under passenger seat 94 The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order
Clothes hook 94 not to restrict the driver's vision.
Storage pockets on the front seats 95
Storage compartment for umbrella 95
Storage compartment on the driver's side
Storage compartment in rear centre console 95
Storage compartment in the rear armrest 96
Fig. 80
Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel 96
Open the storage compartment
Removable ski bag 97 on the driver's side
WARNING
■ Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down while you are driving (under acceleration or when cornering) and
could distract you from the traffic - there is a risk of an accident.
■ Make sure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage
compartments can get into the driver's footwell while you are driving. You
would not be able to brake, operate the clutch pedal or accelerate - danger  Read and observe on page 89 first.
of causing an accident!
■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the Opening
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud- › Raise the handle A » Fig. 80 and open out the compartment in the direction
den braking or the vehicle collides with something. of the arrow.
■ Ash and cigarette or cigar stubs must only be discarded in ashtrays.
Closing
› Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
Car park ticket holder WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
Fig. 79 reasons.
Parking ticket holder

Seats and practical features 89

Storage compartments in the doors WARNING
The storage compartment must never be used as an ashtray or for the stor-
age of combustible materials - fire hazard and risk of damage to the stor-
age compartment!

Note
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which illuminates
when the parking light is on.

Cup holders

Fig. 81 Storage compartment: in the front door/in the rear door Fig. 83
Front centre console: Cup holder
 Read and observe on page 89 first.

WARNING
Use the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project
so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired.

Storage compartment in the front centre console

Fig. 82
Opening the storage compart-
ment

Fig. 84 Rear armrest: Remove cup holder/insert cup holder

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

Open/close  Read and observe on page 89 first.

› Press on the edge of the roof A » Fig. 82 in the direction of the arrow.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Cup holder at the front
On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders, you can cover the cup
holder by pulling on the handle A » Fig. 83 in the direction of the arrow. 

90 Operation
Rear cup holder WARNING
› Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 84 - ■ Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Improper usage can cause
, the cup holder comes out. burns.
› To slide the cup holder in again, press the middle part of the cup hold- ■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in-
er » Fig. 84 -  and slide it into the armrest in the direction of the arrow. dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. They could operate
WARNING the lighter and burn themselves.
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. They may spill if the
vehicle moves – there is a risk of scalding. Note
■ Do not use any cups or beakers made of fragile material (e.g. glass, porce- The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 Volt socket for electrical
lain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident. appliances » page 92, 12 Volt power outlet.

CAUTION Ashtray
■ Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
■ Slide in the cup holder before raising the rear armrest.

Cigarette lighter

Fig. 86 Centre console: Ashtray at the front/rear

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

The ashtray can be used for discarding ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like » .
Removing/inserting the front ash tray
Fig. 85 Centre console: Cigarette lighter, front/rear › Open the ashtray » Fig. 82 on page 90.
› Grasp the ashtray insert in the area A » Fig. 86 and remove it in the direc-
 Read and observe on page 89 first. tion of the arrow 1 .
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Operation
› Press the button of the cigarette lighter A or B » Fig. 85. Removing/inserting the rear ashtray insert
› Wait until the button pops forward. › Open the ashtray » Fig. 95 on page 95.
› Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use. › Grasp the ashtray insert B » Fig. 86 in the area marked with the arrows and
› Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket. remove it in the direction of the arrow 2 .
The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ig- Insertion takes place in reverse order. 
nition key withdrawn » .

Seats and practical features 91

 WARNING WARNING
Never place flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire! ■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. Therefore, when leaving the
Note vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as
The ashtrays are fitted with an interior light which illuminates when the park- children, unattended in the vehicle.
■ If the connected electric device becomes too hot, switch it off and discon-
ing light is on.
nect it from the power supply immediately.
12 Volt power outlet
CAUTION
■ The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces-
sories with a power uptake of up to 120 watt.
■ Never exceed the maximum power consumption, otherwise the vehicle's
electrical system can be damaged.
■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
■ Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets.
■ Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility
in accordance with the applicable directives.
■ Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch
Fig. 87 Boot: Superb / Superb Combi socket the ignition on or off and before starting the engine, to avoid damage from
voltage fluctuations.
 Read and observe on page 89 first. ■ Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices!

The 12-volt power socket (hereinafter referred to only as a socket) is located in Storage compartment under the front armrest
the front center console A » Fig. 85 on page 91 in the rear center console
B » Fig. 85 on page 91 and in the luggage compartment » Fig. 87.
Fig. 88
Use Armrest: Stowage compartment
› Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter » Fig. 85 on
page 91or open the cover for the power socket » Fig. 87.
› Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
The power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when
the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn » .

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

Opening
› Pull and open the cover of the armrest using the handle A in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 88. 

92 Operation
Closing Glasses storage box
› Open the lid to the stop, only then can it be folded downwards and against
the direction of the arrow » Fig. 88.
Fig. 90
The sockets marked  AUX input and the MDI input are located in the stor- Opening the glasses storage box
age compartment.

Note
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which illuminates
when the parking light is on.

Storage net in front centre console

 Read and observe on page 89 first.
Fig. 89
Front centre console: Storage Opening
net › Press the button A » Fig. 90.
The compartment folds in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
› Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 90 until it audibly clicks into place.
WARNING
 Read and observe on page 89 first. The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the
spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed – risk of injury.
WARNING
Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0.5 kg in the storage net.
CAUTION
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
■ Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - they could
get damaged.
CAUTION ■ The compartment must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle –
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage. risk of impairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system!

Seats and practical features 93

Storage compartment on passenger side Note
When the storage compartment is opened, a light illuminates.

Storage compartment under passenger seat

Fig. 92
Front passenger seat: Opening
the storage compartment

Fig. 91 Open tray / control air supply

 Read and observe on page 89 first.

 Read and observe on page 89 first.
A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment.
Opening
Opening › Pull the handle to position 1 » Fig. 92 in the direction of the arrow.
› Press the button » Fig. 91 - . The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow 2 .
The flap folds down.
Closing
Closing › Grip the compartment by the handle and close in the opposite direction to
› Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place. that of the arrow 2 » Fig. 92.
Air supply › Keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed.
› Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 91 WARNING
- .
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
› The air supply is closed by pressing the lever in the opposite direction to that reasons.
of the arrow.
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows CAUTION
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment. The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1.5 kg.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in- in weight.
terior air to flow into the storage compartment.
We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the Clothes hook
cooling system for the storage compartment is not being used.  Read and observe on page 89 first.
WARNING The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors. 
reasons.

94 Operation
 WARNING Storage compartment for umbrella
■ Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks. Never leave any heavy or
sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing. Fig. 94
■ Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing; this may re-
Left rear door: Stowage compart-
duce the effectiveness of the head airbags. ment for an umbrella
■ Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
to the rear.

CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.

Storage pockets on the front seats  Read and observe on page 89 first.

Fig. 93 The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left
Map pockets door » Fig. 94.

Note
An umbrella can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Storage compartment in rear centre console

Fig. 95
 Read and observe on page 89 first. Opening the storage compart-
ment
Pockets for storing maps, magazines etc. are provided on the back of the front
seat backrests » Fig. 93.

WARNING
Never put heavy items in the map pockets – risk of injury.

CAUTION  Read and observe on page 89 first.

Never put large objects into the map pockets, e.g. bottles or objects with sharp
edges - risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings. The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert.
Open/close
› Pull the handle A » Fig. 95 on the upper section of the recess and open out
the compartment in the direction of the arrow.
Closing takes place in reverse order. 

Seats and practical features 95

 WARNING  Read and observe on page 89 first.
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
After folding the rear armrest and cover up, an opening in the seat backrest
not be used for such purposes – risk of fire!
becomes visible through which the removable through-loading bag with skis
can be pushed. The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passen-
Storage compartment in the rear armrest ger compartment or the boot.
Opening from the passenger compartment
Fig. 96 › Fold down the rear armrest » Fig. 76 on page 87.
Opening the storage compart- › Pull the handle A pull up to the stop in the direction of the arrow and fold
ment the cover down » Fig. 97.
Opening from the boot
› Push the unlock button B » Fig. 97 in the direction of the arrow and fold the
cover including the armrest forwards.
Closing
› Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop - the cover must click
 Read and observe on page 89 first. into place.

Opening Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. This is appa-
› Lift button A on the front of the armrest and lift the storage compartment rent as the red field above the unlocking button B » Fig. 97 is not visible from
cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 96. the boot.

Closing WARNING
› Fold back the storage compartment lid in the opposite direction to that of The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are
the arrow » Fig. 96 until it clicks. placed in a properly secured, removable through-loading bag » page 97.

Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel

Fig. 97 Rear seats: Cover handle/boot: Unlock button

96 Operation
Removable ski bag WARNING
■ After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag
Fig. 98 with the securing strap B » Fig. 98.
■ The strap A must hold the skis tight.
Securing the through-loading
■ Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding (also re-
bag
fer to imprint on the through-loading bag).
■ The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24
kg.

Note
■ The through-loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis.
■ Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips
 Read and observe on page 89 first.
facing to the rear. into the through-loading bag.
The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to only as a through- ■ If there are several pairs of skis in the through-loading bag, ensure that the
loading bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis. bindings are positioned at the same height.
■ The through-loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when
Loading moist.
› Open the boot lid.
› Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest down- Luggage compartment
wards » page 96, Rear seat backrest with long cargo channel.
› Place the empty, through-loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag  Introduction
with the zip is in the boot.
› Push the skis into the through-loading bag from the boot » . This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Close the through-loading bag. Class N1 vehicles 98
Securing Fastening elements 99
› Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bind- Fixing nets 99
ings» Fig. 98.
Folding hook 99
› Fold the seat backrest a little forward. Floor covering 100
› Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around Luggage net 100
the upper part of the seat backrest.
› Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlock- Luggage compartment cover 100
ing button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest. Roll up boot cover (Superb Combi) 101
› Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place. Automatic Retractable cargo cover (Superb Combi) 101
Side pockets in luggage compartment 101
On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap B
around the housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the Side compartment in boot with battery 102
through-loading bag in place, it is not longer possible to unroll the net parti- Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi) 102
tion. Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling
characteristics of your vehicle:
› Distribute loads as evenly as possible. 

Seats and practical features 97

› Place heavy objects as far forward as possible. WARNING (Continued)
› Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the ■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
nets » page 99. larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic gers transported on the other rear seats » page 11.
■ If the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied, ensure maxi-
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
mum safety, e.g. by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision.
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object. ■ Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid open or unlatched, other-
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an object wise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poison-
weighing 4.5 kg produces energy corresponding to 20 times its own weight. ing!
This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg “ ”. ■ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle – risk of accident!
Luggage compartment light ■ Do not transport people in the boot!
The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or
closed.
CAUTION
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish ■ It is important to ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heat-
automatically after around 10 minutes. er, the threads of the integrated antenna in the rear window as well as the
Boot light for Superb Combi vehicles » page 103. threads of the integrated antenna (Superb Combi) in the rear side windows,
are not damaged by abrasive items.
WARNING ■ Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load » page 198.
■ Always store transported objects in the boot and attach them to the lash-
ing eyes. Class N1 vehicles
■ Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in
case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users.  Read and observe and on page 98 first.
■ Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – there is
On class N1 vehicles, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set
a risk of death. which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening
■ Please note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling proper-
the load.
ties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity – risk of
accident! The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly. The proper functioning of the electrical system is essential for the safe opera-
■ If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with tion of the vehicle. It is important to ensure that it is not damaged during mod-
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of ifications or when loading or unloading the luggage compartment.
braking manoeuvres or accidents. To prevent items of luggage from moving
around, always use suitable lashing straps that are firmly attached to the
lashing eyes.
■ The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are
able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres – risk of in-
jury!

98 Operation
Fastening elements  Read and observe and on page 98 first.

Examples for attaching the fixing nets » Fig. 100.

A Vertical pocket
B Horizontal pocket
C Floor net

WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets. Heavy ob-
jects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!

CAUTION
Fig. 99 Lashing eyes and fastening elements: Superb / Superb Combi ■ The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1.5 kg.
■ Do not place any sharp objects in the nets – risk of net damage.
 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

The following fastening elements are found in the luggage compart- Folding hook
ment » Fig. 99.
A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets.
B Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets.

CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3.5 kN (350 kg).

Fixing nets

Fig. 101 Folding hooks: Superb / Superb Combi

 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are pro-
vided on both sides of the boot.
Folding forward
› Superb: Press on the lower portion of the hook A and fold down direction of
the arrow 1 » Fig. 101.
Fig. 100 Fastening examples for nets
› Superb Combi: Take hold of hook B in the area of the arrow and fold down in
the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 101.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible hook load is 7.5 kg.

Seats and practical features 99

Floor covering WARNING
Only store soft objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg in the net. Heavy ob-
jects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!

CAUTION
Do not place any sharp objects into the net – risk of net damage.

Luggage compartment cover

Fig. 104
Removing/installing the luggage
Fig. 102 Fixing the floor covering: Superb / Superb Combi compartment cover

 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

The raised floor covering of the luggage compartment can be fixed (e.g. when
handling the spare wheel):
› Superb: With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cov-
er » Fig. 102 – .  Read and observe and on page 98 first.
› Superb combi: With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment
lid » Fig. 102 - . Removing
› Hook the support straps 1 » Fig. 104 onto the boot lid.
Luggage net › Place the cover in the horizontal position.
› Pull the cover out of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear.
Fig. 103 The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.
Luggage net
Fitting
› Push the boot cover into the brackets 2 » Fig. 104.
› Hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the boot cover, the vehicle occupants could
be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with some-
thing.
 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

The luggage net is located on the underside of the luggage compartment cov- Note
er. If the retaining strips 1 are attached to the boot lid, the boot cover will rise
when you open the boot lid.
The net is designed for transporting lighter objects.

100 Operation
Roll up boot cover (Superb Combi) › Open the boot lid.
The foldable boot cover rolls up automatically in the position 1 to » Fig. 105
on page 101.
› Push the cover in the area of the handle in the direction of the arrow 3.
The cover retracts completely.
When the boot lid is opened quickly, the automatic rolling up of the foldable
boot cover is blocked for a delay time of approx. 2 seconds.
The function to automatically roll up the foldable boot cover can be activated/
deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu:
■ Settings
Fig. 105 Roll up cargo cover: take out then pull out or roll up ■ Autom. blind

 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

Side pockets in luggage compartment
Extending
› Pull the foldable boot cover as far as the stop into the secured position
2 » Fig. 105.

Retracting
› Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 105,
and the cover automatically rolls up into position 1 .
Press in the grip area again and the cover will roll up.
Removing/inserting
The fully rolled up luggage compartment cover can be removed (e.g. for the
transport of bulky objects). Fig. 106 Superb boot: Open side compartment left / right 
› Push on the side of the crossbar in the direction of the arrow 4 » Fig. 105
and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 5 .
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover.

Automatic Retractable cargo cover (Superb Combi)

 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

The automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover enables an easier entry in-
to the boot.

Seats and practical features 101

  Read and observe and on page 98 first.
Fig. 107
Superb Combi boot: Open right On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment » page 193.
compartment
Open / close compartment (Superb)
› Unfasten the bolts e.g. with a coin or screwdriver in the direction of the ar-
row 1 » Fig. 108.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Open and close compartment / (Superb Combi)
› For example, insert a coin in the slot A and lift them in the arrow direction
 Read and observe and on page 98 first. 2 » Fig. 108.

Open / close compartment (Superb) The compartment opens out in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Turn the bolts in direction of arrow » Fig. 106. › Close compartment (opposite to arrow direction) 3 until you hear it click.
Closing takes place in reverse order. Note
The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment » Fig. 106 The side compartment where the battery is located is labelled in the Superb
. Combi vehicles with the symbol  .
The first-aid box can also be stored in this compartment.
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi)
Open and close compartment / (Superb Combi)
› Pull the handle in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 107. Fig. 109
› Open the compartment cover downwards. Removing non-lockable side
› When closing keep hold of the handle until the compartment is closed. compartment
The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment.
The first-aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment.

Side compartment in boot with battery

 Read and observe and on page 98 first.

Increasing the size of the boot

› Remove the cover of the stowage compartment in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 109.
CAUTION
When handling the side compartment, ensure that the cover and the cover
mountings are not damaged.

Fig. 108 Open compartment with battery: Superb / Superb Combi

102 Operation
Removable light (Superb Combi) Use light

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use light 103
Changing rechargeable light batteries 103
A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the boot. This lamp has two func-
tions.
› Lighting the luggage compartment - part B » Fig. 110 on page 103 illumina-
ted (lamp in holder).
› Portable lamp - part C illuminated (lamp removed from the holder). Fig. 110 Use light / remove light
If the lamp is in the holder, it is automatically switched on when the boot lid is
opened and switched off again when the boot lid is closed.  Read and observe on page 103 first.
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries. The rechargea- Use light
ble batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running. It takes ap- › If you press button A » Fig. 110 once, the lamp illuminates with 100 % light
prox. 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries. intensity.
The lamp is fitted with magnets. Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp, for › If you press button A again, the lamp illuminates with 50 % light intensity.
example on the vehicle body, after removing it. › Press A button once again - the light goes out.
Remove the lamp from the holder
CAUTION
The removable lamp is not watertight and must therefore be protected against
› Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows D » Fig. 110 and swivel it in the
direction of the arrow E .
moisture.
Reinserting the lamp the holder
Note › First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the
■ If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, it does not light up when boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into
the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged. place.
■ If the lamp is not switched off and it is correctly inserted in the holder, the
bulbs in the front part C » Fig. 110 on page 103 of the lamp are automatically Changing rechargeable light batteries
switched off.
 Read and observe on page 103 first.

Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries

yourself:
› Remove the lamp.
› Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
object from the location of the lock-off clips F » Fig. 110 on page 103.
› Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp.
› Insert the new rechargeable batteries. 

Seats and practical features 103

› Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it Dividing the luggage compartment
clicks into place.
CAUTION Fig. 111
■ We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a ŠKODA Dividing the boot with variable
service partner. If the lamp is not correctly opened, it can be damaged. loading floor
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batter-
ies.
■ The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as
the original rechargeable batteries. If other types of rechargeable batteries are
used, the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the
lamp.

For the sake of the environment

 Read and observe on page 104 first.

Dispose of used rechargeable batteries in accordance with national legal provi- › Lift up the part with the mounting and secure it by sliding it into the grooves
sions. marked with the arrows » Fig. 111.

Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate) Remove variable loading floor

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Dividing the luggage compartment 104
Remove variable loading floor 104
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.

CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.

Note Fig. 112 Boot: Remove variable loading floor/remove carrier rails
The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects.  Read and observe on page 104 first.

› Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes A » Fig. 112 to
the left by around 90°.
› Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the ar-
row.
› Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour-mounted fixing eyes C to
the right by approx. 90°. 

104 Operation
 WARNING  Read and observe on page 105 first.
Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened
The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper.
when installing the variable loading floor. If this is not the case, there is a
risk of injury for the occupants. › Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift gently in the
direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 113.
› Extend the variable load floor over the bumper in the direction of the arrow
Extending variable loading floor with integrated aluminium rails 2 until it engages in the opening C .
and fastening elements (Superb Combi) The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a
seat, for example for changing shoes.
 Introduction
› To push in the rear section of the variable loading floor, grasp by the handle
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: and lift slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 .
Partial extension of variable load floor 105 › Push the variable loading floor against the arrow 2 to the stop.
Divide boot 105 When pulling out the variable loading floor, the front edge (close to the rear
Fit and remove variable loading floor 106 seats) is lifted at the same time. Thus, small objects can no longer fall into the
Fixing set 106 space between the boot floor and the variable loading floor.
Movable lashing eyes 107
CAUTION
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier. Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Divide boot

Note Fig. 114

The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects, for Dividing the boot
example the fastening elements, removed foldable boot cover, etc.

Partial extension of variable load floor

 Read and observe on page 105 first.

The boot can be divided with the variable loading floor.

› Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift in the direc-
tion of the arrow 1 » Fig. 113 on page 105.
› Insert the trailing edge in one of the openings A » Fig. 114.

Fig. 113 Luggage compartment: partially pulling out the variable loading The variable loading floor is secured in the openings A against movement. 
floor

Seats and practical features 105

The variable loading floor can be pulled out a little more before dividing the › Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow
boot with the variable loading floor » page 105. This enlarges the space be- 3 » Fig. 115.
tween the rear seats and the separation. › Press the safety buttons A » Fig. 116 and remove the floor.

CAUTION Fitting
Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged. › Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails.
› Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings B in the carrier
rails » Fig. 116.
Fit and remove variable loading floor
› Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings C on the floor until it clicks in-
to place, if necessary press the safety buttons A .
WARNING
Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation. If
this is not the case, there is a risk of injury for the occupants.

Fixing set

Fig. 115 Luggage compartment: fold up variable loading floor

Fig. 117 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap

 Read and observe on page 105 first.

The fixing set can be used for dividing the boot or for securing the objects
Fig. 116 Luggage compartment: variable loading floor which are being transported.
Telescopic pole
 Read and observe on page 105 first. › Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of
the carrier rails.
The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled, if necessary.
› Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 117 and
Removing simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle, raise it slightly in the direction › Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place. 
of the arrow 1 » Fig. 115 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of
the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C » Fig. 116.

106 Operation
Tensioning strap Net partition (Superb Combi)
› Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening on the left or right carri-
er rail.  Introduction
› Press the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 117 and simultaneous-
ly push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 4 . This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place. Using the net partition behind the rear seats 107
› Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap. Using the net partition behind the front seats 108
› Press the button 5 on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap. Removing and refitting the net partition housing 108
WARNING
WARNING
The objects in the boot must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that
they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to ob-
■ The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding
jects or injuries to occupants. back the seat cushions and backrests - they must be ready to use.
■ The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob-
jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart-
Note
ment under sudden braking – risk of injury.
■ Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set. ■ Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged. Only then can
■ The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function.
5 » Fig. 117. ■ Make sure that the transverse rod is inserted into the mounts
C » Fig. 119 on page 107 or » Fig. 120 on page 108 in the forward position.
Movable lashing eyes
Using the net partition behind the rear seats
Fig. 118
Move lashing eyelets
Fig. 119
Net partition behind the rear
seats in the pulled out state

 Read and observe on page 105 first.

There are four moveable lashing eyelets in the boot that can, for example, be  Read and observe on page 107 first.
used to attach the fixing nets.
Extending
› Press the button in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 118 and move the lashing › Pull the net partition by the tab A » Fig. 119 in the direction of the fasteners
eyelets to the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 . C.
› Fold up the clamp the lashing eyelets A and, for example, attach the fixing › Insert the transverse rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards.
net. › Insert the transverse rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle
in the same way. 

Seats and practical features 107

Retracting Removing and refitting the net partition housing
› Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the other
and remove it from the mounts C » Fig. 119.
› Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into Fig. 121
the housing B without being damaged. Rear seats: Removing the net
partition housing
Note
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, the roll up luggage com-
partment cover can be removed » page 101.

Using the net partition behind the front seats

Fig. 120  Read and observe on page 107 first.

Net partition behind the front
seats in the pulled out state Removing
› Fold the rear seats forward » page 87.
› Open the rear right door.
› Push the housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the
mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 121.
Fitting
› Insert the recesses on the housing A » Fig. 121 into the mounts on the rear
 Read and observe on page 107 first. seat backrests.
› Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 as
Extending far as the stop.
› Fold the rear seats forward » page 87. › Fold the rear seats back into their original positions » page 87.
› Pull the net partition by the tab A » Fig. 120.
› First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it for- Roof rack
ward.
› Insert the transverse rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle  Introduction
in the same way.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Retracting
› Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the other Attachment points 109
and remove it from the mounts C » Fig. 120. Roof load 109
› Hold the transverse rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up WARNING
into the housing B without being damaged.
› Fold the rear seats back into their original positions » page 87. ■ The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached – risk
of accident!
■ Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps
or tensioning straps. 

108 Operation
 WARNING (Continued) Attachment points
■ Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system.
■ When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on Does not apply to the Superb Combi.
the roof rack system, handling of the car may change as a result of the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres.
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of acci-
dent!

CAUTION Fig. 122 Attachment points for roof bars

■ Only roof racks from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range should be used.
■ The fitting instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system must be  Read and observe and on page 108 first.
observed when handling roof racks.
■ On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof, Installation position of the attachment points for roof bars » Fig. 122:
ensure that the opened sliding/tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does A Forward attachment point
not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof. B Rear attachment point
■ Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
■ The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions.
and the load that is secured to it. Compare the vehicle height with available CAUTION
clearances, such as underpasses and garage doors.
■ Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated
Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the en-
closed instructions.
car wash.
■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load.
Roof load
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in higher fuel consumption.
 Read and observe and on page 108 first.

The maximum permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 100 kg and
the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower
load carrying capacity is used. In this case, the roof rack system must only be
loaded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions.

Seats and practical features 109

 CAUTION
Air conditioning system
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
Heating, ventilation, cooling leaves) to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
 Introduction conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Note
Air outlets 110
■ The exhaust air streams out through vents at the rear of the luggage com-
Using the air conditioning system economically 111
partment.
Operational problems 112 ■ We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature. the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air condition-
ing system. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning sys-
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in tem is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and
the vehicle. The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during expense (replacement of compressor).
winter months.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling Air outlets
effect.
Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air con-
ditioning system » page 114 or for Climatronic » page 117.

WARNING
■ For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the win-
dows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to de-
mist and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
■ To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for
the use of the cooling system are to be observed.
■ The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air
temperature should not be greater than about 5 ° C.
■ The cooling system is to be turned off about 10 minutes before the end
of the journey. Fig. 123 Air vents at the front 
■ Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner or the Climatronic is to
be carried out by a specialist company.

110 Operation
 An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air
outlet
Set the direction of the air Active air outlet vents
outlet

 1, 2

 1, 2, 4, 6

 2, 3, 5

 4, 6

Fig. 124 Air vents at the rear

Note
Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind.
 Read and observe and on page 110 first.

Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according Using the air conditioning system economically
to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions.
 Read and observe and on page 110 first.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 2,
3 » Fig. 123 and 5 » Fig. 124 - the outlets can be opened and closed individually. The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine
when in cooling mode which will affect the fuel consumption.
Set the air flow direction
It is recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the
› To adjust the height of the air flow, turn the horizontal vanes up or down interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order
with the movable adjuster A » Fig. 123 » Fig. 124.
to allow the heated air to escape.
› To change the lateral direction of the air flow, turn the vertical fins with the
movable adjuster A » Fig. 123 or » Fig. 124 to the left or right. The cooling system should not be switched on if the windows are open.
Setting the amount of airflow For the sake of the environment
› Turn the knob B » Fig. 123 and » Fig. 124 to position  to fully open the air Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved » page 149, Eco-
outlet.
nomical driving and environmental sustainability.
› Turn the knob B » Fig. 123 and » Fig. 124 to position 0 to close the air outlet.
The knob can be adjusted to any position in-between.

Air conditioning system 111

Operational problems Note
■ We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a spe-
 Read and observe and on page 110 first. cialist garage once every year.
■ During operation of the air conditioning, an increase in engine idle speed may
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5
occur under certain circumstances in order to ensure sufficient heating com-
°C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be.
fort.
› One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse and replace if necessa-
ry » page 220.
Control elements
› The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because
the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot » page 31.
If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself, or if the cooler
output has reduced, switch off the cooling system and seek assistance from a
specialist garage.

Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning system)

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Control elements 112
adjusting 114
Recirculated air mode 114
Fig. 125 The air conditioning system: Control elements
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
 The cooling system is switched on » page 112.  Read and observe on page 112 first.
 The engine is running.
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 125:
 The outside temperature is above approximately +2 °C.
A Set the temperature (turn to the left: to reduce the temperature, turn to
 The blower is switched on.
the right: to increase the temperature)
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow out of B Set the blower level (level 0: blowers off, level 4: the highest blower
the vents when the cooling system is switched on. speed)
If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 110
cooling system, fresh air mode should be selected.  Switch the cooling system on/off
The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to  Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 75
provide cooling at a high load of the engine.  Aux. heating on/off » page 118
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 114
CAUTION
 Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 85
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially
 Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 85 
around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when get-
ting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.

112 Operation
 Note
The warning light in the symbol button  illuminates after activation, even if
not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are
met » page 112. The operational readiness of the cooling system is indicated by
the warning light in the button illuminating.

Air conditioning system 113

 adjusting
 Read and observe on page 112 first.

Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes:
Control dial settings » Fig. 125 on page 112 Button » Fig. 125 on page 112
Air outlet vents 2 » Fig. 123
Settings
on page 110
A B C
 
Defrost/defog windscreen and Desired tempera- Automatically Open and align with the
side windowsa) ture
3 or 4  switched on
Do not switch on
side window
To the stop to the
The fastest heating
right
3  Switched off Briefly switch on Opening

Desired tempera-
Comfortable heating
ture
2 or 3  Switched off Do not switch on Opening

To the stop to the briefly 4, then

The fastest cooling
left 2 or 3  Activated Briefly switch on Opening

Desired tempera-
Comfortable cooling
ture
1, 2 or 3  Activated Do not switch on Open and align to the roof

To the stop to the

Fresh air mode - ventilation
left
Desired position  Switched off Do not switch on Opening

a) We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels. This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside.

We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 » Fig. 123 on page 110 in Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution con-
the opened position. trol C » Fig. 125 on page 112 is turned to the  position.
Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by pressing
Recirculated air mode the  button again.
 Read and observe on page 112 first. WARNING
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in- Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
to the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in “stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
a traffic jam. levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
Switching on/off start to mist up.
› Press the  button.
The warning light in the button illuminates.
› Press the  button again.
The warning light in the button goes out.

114 Operation
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system) Note
■ We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage
 Introduction once every year.
■ During operation of the Climatronic, an increase in engine idle speed can oc-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: cur under certain circumstances in order to ensure adequate heating comfort.
Control elements 115 ■ On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted radio or radio navigation system,
automatic mode 116 the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays. This function can
Switching the cooling system on/off 116 be switched off, see » operating instructions for the radio or navigation sys-
tem.
Setting the temperature 116
Recirculation mode - Version 1 117
Control elements
Recirculation mode - Version 2 117
Controlling blower 118
Defrosting windscreen 118
The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting for the
temperature of the air flowing out, the blower stage and air distribution.
The system also takes sunlight into account, which eliminates the need to al-
ter the settings manually.
The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met.
 The cooling system is switched on » page 112.
 The engine is running.
 The outside temperature is above approximately +2 °C.
 The blower is switched on.
The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to Fig. 126 Climatronic: Control elements
provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 126:
Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off A Adjust the temperature for the left side » page 116
On models fitted with power sliding/tilting roof with solar cells, the fresh air
B Adjust the blower speed  » page 118
blower is automatically switched over to “solar mode” if the sun rays are suffi-
cient after switching off the ignition. The solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof C depending on equipment:
deliver power for the fresh air blower. This supplies the interior of the car with ›  Aux. heating on/off » page 119
fresh air. ›  Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 75
D Adjust the temperature for the right side » page 116
For an optimum ventilation, the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be
E Interior temperature sensor
opened » Fig. 123 on page 110.
F depending on equipment:
The ventilation functions only when the sliding/tilting roof is fully closed. ›  Recirculation mode with air quality sensor on/off » page 117, Recir-
culation mode - Version 1
›  Recirculation mode without air quality sensor on/off » page 117, Re-
circulation mode - Version 2 

Air conditioning system 115

 Switch the intensive windscreen heater on/off By pressing the button  again, it is changed to “HIGH”-mode.
 Air flow to the windows Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing any of the air distribution
 Air flow to the upper body buttons or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed.
 Air flow in the footwell
 Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 75 Switching the cooling system on/off
 Control the seat heater on the front left seat » page 85
› Press the button .
 Switching automatic mode on » page 116
The warning light in the button illuminates.
 Switching Climatronic system off
 Switch the cooling system on/off » page 116 › Press button  once more.
 Switch the temperature setting in Dual mode on/off » page 116 The warning light in the button goes out.
 Control the seat heater on the front right seat » page 85 After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation and heating func-
Note tion remains active whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is
the outside temperature.
Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor E , other-
wise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic.
Setting the temperature
automatic mode The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or to-
gether.
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car. For both sides
Recommended setting for all periods of the year
› Turn the control dial A » Fig. 126 on page 115 to the left or right to increase
or decrease the temperature.
› Set the required temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C: we recommend 22
°C. The warning light in the button  does not illuminate.
› Press the button  » Fig. 126 on page 115. For the right side
› Set the air outlet vents 2 and 3 » Fig. 123 on page 110 so that the air flow is › Turn the control dial D » Fig. 126 on page 115 to the left or right to increase
directed slightly upwards.
or decrease the temperature.
After pressing, a warning light in the top right or left corner of the button  The warning light in the button  illuminates.
illuminates, depending on which mode was last selected.
If the warning light in the symbol button is lit, the temperature for both
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button  illuminates, the
sides cannot be set with the control dial A . This function can be restored by
Climatronic operates in “HIGH”-mode.
pressing the symbol button . The warning light in the button goes out.
The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic.
The interior temperature can be set between +18 ℃ and +26 ℃. The interior
Upon pressing the  button again, the Climatronic switches to “LOW”-mode temperature is regulated automatically within this range.
and the warning light in the top left corner illuminates. The Climatronic uses
If a temperature lower than +18 °C is selected, a blue symbol illuminates at the
only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the
start of the numerical scale.
noise level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of
the air conditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occu- If a temperature higher than +26 °C is selected, a red symbol illuminates at the
pied. start of the numerical scale. 

116 Operation
At both end positions, Climatronic functions at maximum cooling/heating out- WARNING
put and the temperature is not regulated. Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
CAUTION
levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially dent increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when get- start to mist up.
ting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.
Note
Recirculation mode - Version 1
■ As soon as the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button . Press the
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in-  button once the windscreen has demisted.
to the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in ■ The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside tempera-
a traffic jam. ture is higher than approx. 2 °C.
If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the
air quality sensor, recirculated air mode will temporarily be switched off. Recirculation mode - Version 2
If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level, the air distri- Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting in-
bution control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into to the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in
the vehicle interior. a traffic jam.
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior. fed back into the interior.
When the automatic air distribution control is switched on, an air quality sen- The air recirculation mode is automatically activated after the ignition is
sor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air. switched if it was on before the ignition was turned off. The warning light in
the button illuminates.
Switching recirculated air mode on
› Repeatedly press the button  until the warning light on the left side of Switch off / on
the button is illuminated. › Press the  button.
Switch on automatic air distribution control The warning light in the button goes out.
› Repeatedly press the button  until the warning light on the right-hand › Press the  button again.
side of the button illuminates.
The warning light in the button illuminates.
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily
If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatic recirculated air mode WARNING
when there is an unpleasant smell, you can switch in on manually. Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention
› Press the  button. levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
The warning light illuminates in the button on the left side. dent increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows
start to mist up. 
Switching recirculated air mode off
› Press the button  or press the symbol button  again until the warning
lights in the button go out.

Air conditioning system 117

 Note Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
As soon as the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button . Press the
 button once the windscreen has demisted.  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Controlling blower
Switching on/off 119
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with
Radio remote control 120
the interior temperature.
Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
However, the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular
tion)
needs.
 The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
› Repeatedly pressing the symbol button  on the left or right reduces or in-  The fuel supply is adequate (the warning icon  is not lit in the display of
creases blower speed.
the instrument cluster).
If the blower is switched off, the Climatronic system is switched off.
Auxiliary ventilation
The set blower speed is displayed above the symbol button  when the re- The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by
spective number of warning lights illuminate. switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
WARNING
■ “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce atten- Additional heating (hereinafter only as a aux. heating)
tion levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an ac- The auxiliary heating can be used when both when stationary, when the en-
cident increases. gine is switched off, to preheat the vehicle and also while driving (e.g. during
■ Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary. the heating phase of the engine).
■ Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up. The aux. heating functions in connection with the air conditioning system or
Climatronic.
Defrosting windscreen The auxiliary heating also warms up the engine. This is not valid for vehicles
with the 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
Switching on
› Press the  button » Fig. 126 on page 115. The auxiliary heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehi-
› Press the  button » Fig. 126 on page 115. cle tank. This warms the air flowing into the passenger compartment (if the
blower is turned on).
Switching off
Depending on the environmental conditions, the automatic on or off of the
› Press the symbol button  again or press the symbol button . heater occurs, which causes the best possible conditions for the engine run-
› Press the  button again. ning and the interior heating.
More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 » Fig. 123 on page 110. The tempera-
For vehicles with petrol engines, the automatic switching on and off of the
ture control is controlled automatically.
heater can be disabled at a specialist workshop. 

118 Operation
 WARNING Switching on/off
■ The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag-
es) – risk of poisoning!
■ The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk
of fire.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. If you want to use the heater, then the car should not be
parked in places where the exhaust gases can come into contact with flam-
mable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel or simi-
lar - Risk of fire.

CAUTION
■ The running auxiliary heater consumes fuel from the vehicle tank and auto- Fig. 127 Button for switching on/off the system directly on the operating
matically controls the filling level. If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the part of the air conditioning/Climatronic
fuel tank, the auxiliary heating switches off.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside  Read and observe and on page 119 first.
of the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.
The auxiliary heating can be switched on/off as follows.
■ If the auxiliary heating is running, the vehicle battery discharges. If the auxili-
ary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer peri- Manually switching on
od, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehi-  using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning/Cli-
cle battery. matronic. The warning light in the button illuminates » Fig. 127.
■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
 by using the radio remote control » page 120.
leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
Manually switching off
Note
 using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning/Cli-
■ The auxiliary heating switches on the blower B » Fig. 125 on page 112
matronic. The warning light in the button goes out » Fig. 127,
or » Fig. 126 on page 115 only if it has achieved a coolant temperature of ap-
prox. 50 °C.  by using the radio remote control » page 120.
■ At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump still runs for a short
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operat- period.
ing problem.
■ So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the aux- Automatic switching on/off
iliary heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected The following menu items can be selected from the Aux. heating menu item in
by you, leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open po- the information display » page 47 (depending on the vehicle equipment):
■ Day of the week - set the current day of the week;
sition. It is recommended to put the air flow in the position  or .
■ Running time - Set the required running time in 5 minute increments. The
running time can be 10 to 60 minutes.
■ Mode - Set the desired heating/ventilation mode; 

Air conditioning system 119

■ Starting time 1, Starting time 2, Starting time 3 - for each pre-set time, the  Read and observe and on page 119 first.
day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for switching on the auxiliary
heating. An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when Explanation of graphic » Fig. 128
selecting the day. If this empty position is selected, the activation is per- A Aerial
formed without taking into account the day. B Warning light
■ Activate - Activate pre-set mode;
 Switch on the auxiliary heating
■ Deactivate - Deactivate pre-set mode;
 Switch off the auxiliary heating
■ Factory settings - Restore factory settings
■ Back - Return to main menu The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote con-
trol. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
When the battery is fully charged, the range of the remote control is a few
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
hundred metres. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad
After the auxiliary heating activates automatically at the set time, it is neces- weather conditions and a weaker battery in the remote control can clearly re-
sary to pre-set a time again. duce the range.
If the menu item Back is selected or no changes are made on the display for To switch the auxiliary heating on or off, hold the remote control vertically,
longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-set time is not with the aerial A pointing upwards. The antenna must not be covered with
activated. the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process.
The system switches itself off at the end of the running time set under the The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the radio re-
menu item Running time. mote control, if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle
is at least 2 m.
Note
A warning light on the button  » Fig. 127 illuminates when the system is run- After pressing the button, the warning light in the remote control gives the
ning. user different kinds of feedback:
Display warning light B » Fig. 128 Meaning
Radio remote control The auxiliary heating has been
Lights up green for around 2 seconds.
switched on.
Fig. 128 The auxiliary heating has been
Auxiliary heater: Radio remote Lights up red for around 2 seconds.
switched off.
control
Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec- The ignition signal was not received.
onds.
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g
Quickly flashes green for around 2 because the tank is nearly empty or
seconds. there is a fault in the auxiliary heat-
ing.
The switch off signal was not re-
Flashes red for around 2 seconds.
ceived.
The battery is weak, however the
Lights up orange for around 2 sec-
switching on or off signal was re-
onds, then green or red.
ceived. 

120 Operation
 Display warning light B » Fig. 128 Meaning Communication and multimedia
The battery is weak, however the
Lights up orange for around 2 sec-
switching on or off signal was not re- General information
onds, then flashes green or red.
ceived.
The battery is discharged, however  Introduction
Flashes orange for around 5 seconds. the switching on or off signal was not This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
received.
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems 121
Replace the battery » page 216. Universal telephone preinstallation (hands-free) 122
CAUTION Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 122
The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore Symbols in the MAXI DOT display 123
be protected against water, severe impacts and direct sunlight. Phone Phonebook 124

Mobile phones and two-way radio systems

ŠKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems
with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission
power of up to 10 watts.
Please ask at a specialist workshop about installing and operating mobile
phones and two-way radio systems that have a transmission power of more
than 10 W.
Operating mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with the
functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle.
This could be for the following reasons.
› no external aerial.
› external aerial incorrectly installed.
› transmission power greater than 10 watts.
WARNING
■ If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in a vehicle with-
out an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incor-
rectly, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the
vehicle.
■ Two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts must not be installed
on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags. 

Communication and multimedia 121

 WARNING (Continued) Note
■ Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in any area ■ We recommend that mobile phones and two-way radio systems be installed
where it can become a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an in the vehicle by a specialist workshop.
accident or a collision — risk of injury. ■ Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth® communication are compatible
■ Before transport of the vehicle by air, the Bluetooth® function must be with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III. Ask a ŠKODA
switched off by a specialist company. Partner whether your phone is compatible with the universal telephone prepa-
ration GSM II or GSM III.
■ The range of the Bluetooth® connection to the hands-free system is restric-
Universal telephone preinstallation (hands-free) ted to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obsta-
The universal telephone preinstallation (hands-free system) includes a con- cles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your
venience mode for the mobile phone via voice control, the multifunction steer- mobile phone is in a jacket pocket, for example, this can lead to difficulties
ing wheel and the radio or navigation system. when establishing a connection with the hands-free-system or transferring
data.
WARNING
■ Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
■ Only use the device in such a way that you are in full control of your vehi-
cle in every traffic situation – there is the risk of accidents!
■ The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be
observed.

Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel

There are buttons in the steering wheel for easy operation of the basic func-
tions of the phone » Fig. 129 so that the driver is distracted from the traffic as
little as possible when using the phone.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal tele-
phone installation at the factory.
The buttons control the functions for the operating mode of the current tele-
phone.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated. 
Fig. 129 Multifunction steering wheel: Control buttons for the telephone

122 Operation
 Button/
wheel Action Function
» Fig. 129
1 Press briefly (MUTE )
1 Turn upwards Increase volume
1 Turn downwards Decrease volume
Accept a call/end a call
2 Press briefly
Display of the basic Phone menu → Main Phone menu → List of dialled numbers → Call selected contact
Press button for a long period
2 Reject the incoming call
of time
3 Turn up/down Previous / next menu item
3 Press briefly Confirm selected menu item
Press button for a long period
3 Continuously display first letter of the phone book
of time
3 Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book
3 Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book
4 Press briefly Return to previous level in the menu
Press button for a long period
4 Exit telephone menu
of time

Symbols in the MAXI DOT display

Symbol Meaning Valid for
 Charge status of the telephone battery a)
GSM II, GSM III
 Signal strengtha) GSM II, GSM III
 A phone is connected with the hands-free system. GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile
 The hands-free system is visible to other devices GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile
 A phone is connected with the hands-free system. GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
 The hands-free system is visible to other devices GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
 A multimedia unit is connected to the hands-free system GSM II, GSM III
 A UMTS network is available GSM III
 Internet connection via the hands-free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile
a) This function is only supported by some mobile phones.

Communication and multimedia 123

 Phone Phonebook Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II
A phone phonebook is part of the hands-free system. This phone phonebook  Introduction
can be used depending on the type of mobile phone.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
After the telephone's first connection to the hands-free system, the phone
book from the phone and the SIM card loads into the hands-free memory. Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system 124
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands- Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 125
free system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following func-
can take a few minutes. During this period, the available phone book is the one tions.
stored at the previous update. Newly stored telephone numbers are only › Phone Phonebook » page 124.
shown after the updating has ended. › Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering
The update is interrupted if a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, wheel » page 122.
voice control dialogue) occurs during the updating procedure. After the tele- › Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 122.
phone event has ended, the updating starts anew. › Voice control of the telephone » page 131.
› Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 134.
GSM II
The internal phonebook provides 2,500 free memory locations. Each contact All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle's hands-free sys-
can contain up to 4 numbers. tem is established with the help of Bluetooth® technology.

On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1,200 Note
telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance. The following guidelines must be observed » page 121, Mobile phones and
If the number of loaded contacts exceeds 2,500, the phone book is not com- two-way radio systems.
plete.
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system
GSM III
The internal phonebook provides 2000 free memory locations. Each contact To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, the two devices must
can contain up to 5 numbers. be paired. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions
for your mobile phone.
On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1000
telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance. The following steps must be carried out for the connection.
If the mobile phone's telephone book has more than 2,000 contacts, the fol- › Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
lowing message will appear in the MAXI DOTdisplay: phone.
Phone book not fully loaded
› Switch on the ignition.
› Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
› Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
› Confirm the PIN .
1) 

1) Depending on the Bluetooth® version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
is either displayed, or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually.

124 Operation
› If the hands-free system announces (as standard SKODA_BT) on the display Solving connection problems
of the mobile phone, enter the PIN1) within 30 seconds and wait, until the If the hands-free system reports No paired phone found, check the operating
connection is established2). status of the mobile phone.
› To finish pairing, confirm the creation of the new user profile in the MAXI › Is the mobile phone switched on?
DOT display. › Is the PIN code entered?
If there is no free space available to create a new user profile, delete an exist- › Is Bluetooth® active?
ing user profile. › Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?
› Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands-free system?
During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected
with the hands-free system. Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands-free system, whereby
only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system. The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu.
■ Phone book
The visibility of the hands-free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes ■ Dial number3)
after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile ■ Call register
phone has connected to the hands-free system. ■ Voice mailbox
Restoring the visibility of the hands-free system ■ Bluetooth3)
If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free ■ Settings4)
system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition, the visibility of the ■ Back
hands-free system can be re-established for 3 minutes in the following ways. Phone book
› By turning the ignition off and on. The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone
› By turning voice control off and on. memory and the mobile phone SIM card.
› In the Bluetooth - Visibility menu in the MAXI DOT display.
Dial number
Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The re-
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel
the already paired mobile phone2). Check on your mobile phone if the automatic and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9,
connection has been established. symbols , , # and the Cancel, Call and Delete functions. 
Disconnecting the connection
› By withdrawing the ignition key.
› By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
› By disconnecting the user in the Bluetooth - Users menu item in the MAXI
DOT display.

1) Depending on the Bluetooth® version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
is either displayed, or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually.
2) Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth® connection
is completed by inputting a code. If the authorisation input is required, it must always be performed
when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
3) On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » Operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
4) This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system.

Communication and multimedia 125

Call register Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl
The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item.
■ Missed calls - List of missed calls
■ Dialled nos. - List of dialled numbers
 Introduction
■ Received calls - list of received calls This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Voice mailbox Connecting the phone to the hands-free system 127
In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set the number of the voice mailbox1) Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 128
and then dial the number. Internet connection via Bluetooth® 129
Bluetooth The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III comprises the following func-
The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item. tions.
■ User - Overview of the stored telephones › Phone Phonebook » page 124.
■ New user - Search for new mobile phones in reception range › Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel » page 122.
■ Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devi- › Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 128.
ces › Voice control of the telephone » page 131.
■ Media player - Playback via Bluetooth® › Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 134.
■ Active device - Connected device › Internet connection » page 129.
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices › Display of SMS messages » page 128.
■ Find - Device search
■ Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT)
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your
vehicle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Blue-
Settings tooth® technology.
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item.
■ Phone book - Phonebook
rSAP - Remote SIM access profile
■ Update1) - Update the phone book
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP pro-
■ List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
file, the telephone deregisters from the GSM network, and communication
■ Surname - Arrange according to surname
with the network is only enabled by the hands-free system via the vehicle's
■ Surname - Sort by contact name
external aerial. In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth® remains ac-
■ Ring tone - Ring tone setting
tive. In this case, you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the
hands-free system, deactivate the Bluetooth® connection or dial the emergen-
Back cy number 112 (only valid in some countries).
Return to the telephone's basic menu.
HFP - Hands Free Profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP pro-
file, the telephone continues to use its GSM module and the internal antenna
to communicate with the GSM network. 

1) On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » Operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.

126 Operation
 Note › Confirm the PIN .1)

The following guidelines must be observed » page 121, Mobile phones and › Follow the instructions on the MAXI DOT display and the mobile phone to
two-way radio systems. store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data
from the SIM card into the hands-free system.
Connecting the phone to the hands-free system The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile.
To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to in- If the PIN code was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and con-
terconnect the telephone and hands-free system. Detailed information on this nected with the hands-free system the next time the ignition is switched on.
is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone. The following Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been
steps must be carried out for the connection. established.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile Disconnecting the connection
› Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele- › By removing the key from the ignition lock (the connection is disconnected
phone. For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP during a telephone call).
function. › By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
› Switch on the ignition. › Select the user by disconnecting the user in the MAXI DOT display in the
› Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until Bluetooth - User menu option - Disconnect.
the hands-free system has completed the search. On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory, it
› Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found. is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ig-
› Confirm the PIN1). nition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio2) or naviga-
› If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN code for the SIM card tion system; refer to the » Operating instructions for the radio or navigation
in your phone. The telephone connects to the hands-free system (during the system.
first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the MAXI DOT display
when the vehicle is stationary, as this is the only situation when you can Note
choose whether the PIN code should be stored). ■ In the memory of the hands-free system, up to three users can be stored,
› To save a new user, follow the instructions in the MAXI DOT display. whereby the hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user.
› Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the tele- If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone, one of the users
phone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the hands-free must be deleted.
system. ■ When connecting to the hands-free system, follow the instructions on your
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HPP profile mobile phone.
› Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
phone.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
› Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
1) Depending on the Bluetooth® version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
will either be displayed, or a 16-digit code displayed in the MAXI DOTdisplay will need to be entered into
your mobile phone and confirmed within 30 seconds by following the instructions on your mobile phone
display.
2) Does not apply for Radio Swing.

Communication and multimedia 127

 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
■ Dialled nos. - List of dialled numbers
■ Delete lists - Delete call registers
If no phone is connected to the hands-free system, the message No paired Voice mailbox
phone found appears along with the following menu items when the Phone In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set or save the number of the voice
menu is selected. mailbox and then dial the number. The required numbers must be selected one
■ Help - This menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memo- after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjust-
ry of the hands-free system. ment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # and the Delete, Call,
■ Connect - This menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stor- Store and Back functions.
ed in the memory of the hands-free system.
■ New user - New phone Messages1)
■ Media player - Media player A list of received text messages is displayed in the Messages menu item. After
■ Active device - Connected device calling a message, the following functions appear.
■ Show - Display text message
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices
■ Read - The system reads out the selected text message through the vehi-
■ Find - Device search
■ Visibility - Visibility on/off cle's speakers
■ Send time - Display message send time
■ SOS - Emergency call
■ Call back - Dial the phone number of the sender of the text message
If a telephone is paired with the hands-free system, the following menu items ■ Copy - Copy the received text message to the SIM card of your mobile phone
can be selected in the Phone menu. ■ Delete - Delete the message

Phone book Bluetooth

The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item.
memory and the mobile phone SIM card. ■ User - Overview of the stored telephones
■ Connect - Connection with the telephone
The following functions are available for each phone contact.
■ Disconnect - Disconnection of telephone
■ Display telephone number ■ Rename - Rename the telephone
■ Voice tag - Voice tag for the contact ■ Delete - Delete the telephone
■ Play - Play a voice tag ■ New user - Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range
■ Record - Record a voice contact ■ Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devi-

Dial number ces

■ Media player - Media player
Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The re-
■ Active device - Connected device
quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices
and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9,
■ Connect - Connection with the device
symbols +, , # and the Delete, Call and Back functions.
■ Rename - Rename the device
Call register ■ Delete - Delete the device
The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item. ■ Authorisation - Authorise the device 
■ Missed calls - List of missed calls
■ Received calls - list of received calls

1) Only applies when connecting the telephone to the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.

128 Operation
 ■ Search - Search for available media players ■ Network mode - Network mode
■ Visibility - Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for media play- ■ UMTS - UMTS
ers in the vicinity ■ GSM - GSM
■ Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the ■ Automatic - automatic
internet ■ SIM mode - Applies to telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously
■ Active device - Connected device support the operation of two SIM cards - there is an option to choose which
■ Paired devices - List of paired devices SIM card to connect to the hands-free system
■ Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT) ■ SIM mode 1 - SIM 1 is connected to the hands-free system
■ SIM mode 2 - SIM 2 is connected to the hands-free system
WLAN ■ Phone mode - Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode
Wi-Fi menu item» page 131, Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display. ■ Premium - rSAP mode
Settings ■ Hands-free - HFP mode
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item. ■ Off time - Set the off time in increments of 5 min
■ Phone book - Phonebook ■ Access point - Set the Internet access point
■ Update - Read in the phone book ■ APN - Change the access point name
■ Select memory - Select memory with phone contacts ■ User name - User Name
■ SIM & phone - Download the contacts of the SIM card and the phone ■ Password - Password
■ SIM card - Download the contacts from the SIM card ■ Switch off ph. - Switch off the hands-free system (the mobile phone remains
■ Phone - Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card; it is nec- paired)
essary to switch to the SIM & phone menu item
Back
■ List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
Return to the main menu in the MAXI DOT display.
■ Surname - Arrange according to surname
■ Surname - Sort by contact name
■ Own number - Optionally display your own telephone number on the display Internet connection via Bluetooth®
of the device of the person you are calling (this function is network-depend- A notebook can, for example, be connected to the Internet via the hands-free
ent) system.
■ Network depnd. - Network-dependent own number display
■ Yes - Allow display of your own number The control unit of the hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and
■ No - Prohibit display of your own number UMTS/3G technologies.
■ Signal settings - Signal settings An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the
■ Ring tone - Ring tone setting rSAP profile.
■ Volume - Signal volume settings
■ Turn vol. up - Increase volume The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type
■ Turn vol. down - Decrease volume and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be
■ Phone settings - Phone settings connected. Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate
■ Select operator - Select operator knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device .
■ Automatic - Automatic operator selection Sequence for connection
■ Manual - Manual operator selection
› Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system.
› Set the access point in the Phone - Settings - Access point menu (depending
on the operator, usually “Internet”). 

Communication and multimedia 129

› Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices in the If the Wi-Fi network is switched on, the display will show the following mes-
Phone - Bluetooth - Visibility menu. sage, for example: WLAN SK_WLAN 1234 switched on.
› Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth® de- The display then shows a password for the Wi-Fi network connection. The
vices.
password can subsequently be found in the Phone - Wi-Fi - Password - Show
› Select the hands-free system (as standard “SKODA_BT”) from the list of menu.
found devices.
› Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instruc- If no data connection via WLAN is available, the display will show the message
tions given on this device or in the MAXI DOTdisplay. Data connection not available.. This can be caused by a weak GSM signal, for
› Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser. The operating example. Try to establish the connection again at a location with stronger sig-
system requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access nal reception.
(depending on the operator, usually “*99#”).
Switching off
› Select the Wi-Fi - Off menu item in the Phone menu.
Wi-Fi
The display shows the message Switch off Wi-Fi?
 Introduction › Select the OK menu item.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The display shows the message Wi-Fi switch off.
Switching Wi-Fi network on/off 130
Connecting an external device to the WLAN network
Connecting an external device to the WLAN network 130
Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display 131 Connecting using the Wi-Fi network search
WLAN (also Wi-Fi) is a wireless network for connecting to the Internet.
› Switch on the Wi-Fi network » page 130, Switching Wi-Fi network on/off.
› On the device to be connected, search for available WLAN networks (Wi-Fi) -
Using a mobile phone connected with the universal telephone preparation see operating instructions for the device to be connected.
GSM III via the rSAP profile, it is possible to establish a Wi-Fi network in the ve- › Select the appropriate Wi-Fi network connection in the menu of the net-
hicle and to enable passengers with compatible devices to connect to this net- works found (e.g. Wi-Fi SK_WLAN 1234).
work. If menu item WPA2 is set in the Phone - Wi-Fi - Settings - Encryption menu,
then the password displayed when the Wi-Fi is switched on must be entered
Switching Wi-Fi network on/off in the device to be connected. The password can be found in the Phone - Wi-Fi
Switching on - Password - Show menu.
› Connect the mobile phone with the universal telephone preparation GSM III If menu item Open is set in the Phone - Wi-Fi - Settings - Encryption menu,
via the rSAP profile » page 127. the connection is made automatically.
› Select the Wi-Fi menu item in the Phone menu. Connecting using WPS (service for easy connection)
The display shows the message Switch on Wi-Fi?? › Switch on the Wi-Fi network » page 130, Switching Wi-Fi network on/off.
› Select the Yes menu item. › Open the Phone - Wi-Fi - WPS config. menu in the instrument cluster.
› In the device to be connected, select the connection using WPS function -
If no access point1) is assigned automatically, then this must be entered man- see operating instructions for the device to be connected. 
ually as per the instructions from the mobile network operator, e.g. “Internet”.

1) The name of the access point is defined by the mobile operator.

130 Operation
If the Pushbutton menu item is selected in the instrument cluster, the Wi-Fi ■ Settings - WLAN network settings
connection is made automatically. ■ Access point - Access point settings
■ Settings - Access point management
If the WPS PIN menu item is selected in the instrument cluster, then a PIN
■ APN - Change the access point name
must be entered in the device to be connected and the instrument cluster.
■ User name - User Name
■ Password - Password
Use WLAN network in MAXI DOT display ■ Reset - Reset access point factory settings
■ Prioritisation - Set the connection priority
When a Wi-Fi network is switched on, the following menu items are displayed ■ Calls - Set the connection priority for calls
when the Wi-Fi menu item is selected: ■ Data - Set the connection priority for data transfer
■ Off - Switch off the WLAN network (depending on the context) ■ Encryption- Set the encryption
■ Device list - Display a list of external devices ■ WPA2 - Enable WPA 2 encryption
■ Active device - Display a list of active devices ■ Open - No encryption
■ Block - Block device connections ■ Visibility - Set the WLAN network visibility
■ Known devices - Display a list of known devices ■ Visible - WLAN network is visible to other devices
■ Rename - Rename the device ■ Invisible - WLAN network is not visible to other devices
■ Block - Block device connections ■ Data roaming - Set the data roaming
■ Device blocked - Display of a list of blocked devices ■ No roaming - Data roaming is not allowed
■ Unblock - Remove the connection block ■ Allow - Data roaming is allowed
■ Delete lists - Delete device lists ■ Always ask - Question setting for data roaming
■ Known devices - Delete the list of known devices ■ Wi-Fi Channel - Select WLAN network channels (preferably set to channel
■ Device blocked - Delete the list of blocked devices
11)
■ Both lists - Delete both device lists ■ Channel 1 ... Channel 11 - Display the WLAN network channels
■ Password - Use of password to log on to the WLAN network ■ Reset - Reset Wi-Fi network factory settings
■ Show - Display a password to log on to the WLAN network
■ Generate - Generate a new password to log on to the WLAN network
■ Wi-Fi Name - Use of WLAN network name Voice control
■ Show - Display the WLAN network name
■ Rename - Rename the WLAN network  Introduction
■ WPS config. - Wi-Fi network connection using WPS
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
■ Pushbutton - Automatic connection
■ WPS PIN - PIN entry for the connection Dialogue 132
■ Data counter - Display information about the volume of data transferred Voice commands - GSM II 133
■ Current Connection - display of the volume of data transferred for the cur- Voice commands - GSM III 133
rent connection
■ Total - Display of the total volume of data transferred
■ Reset - Resetting of the information about the volume of data transferred

Communication and multimedia 131

 Dialogue The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continu-
ous digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken dig-
its (two, three).
Activating voice control - GSM II
Briefly press button 1 » Fig. 130 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Deactivating voice control - GSM II
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message
currently being played by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi function
steering wheel.
If the system is expecting a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself
as follows.
Fig. 130 Multifunction steering wheel › With the CANCEL voice command.
› Briefly press button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel.
The voice control system (hereinafter referred to as the system) makes it pos-
sible to use voice commands for some functions of the hands-free system. Activating voice control - GSM III
The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 » Fig. 130
The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice com- on the multifunction steering wheel1).
mands and to carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible
feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions. Deactivating voice control - GSM III
If the system is currently playing a message, the message that is currently be-
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors.
ing played must be terminated by pressing the button 1 » Fig. 130 on the
› Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses. multi function steering wheel.
› Avoid a bad pronunciation.
› Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, to reduce or stop disturbing exte- If the system is expecting a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself
rior noise. as follows.
› It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your › With the CANCEL voice command.
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise. › Briefly press button 1 » Fig. 130 on the multifunction steering wheel.
› During the dialogue, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk- Note
ing at the same time.
› Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement. ■ The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.
■ The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and di- steering wheel with telephone control.
rected to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front ■ On vehicles that are factory fitted with the Columbus navigation system, it is
passenger can operate the equipment. only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this de-
Entering a phone number vice» Operating instructions for the Columbus navigation system, chap-
The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually ter Voice control for the navigation system.
spoken digits (the whole number at once) or in the form of digital blocks (sepa-
rated by short pauses). After each order of digits (separation through brief
voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system.

1) Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system.

132 Operation
 Voice commands - GSM II Voice commands - GSM III
Basic voice commands Basic voice commands
Voice command Action Voice command Action
After this command the system repeats all possible After this command the system repeats all possible
HELP HELP
commands. commands.
This command calls up the contact from the phone After this command, a name can be entered to es-
CALL XYZ CALL NAME
book. tablish a connection with the requested party.
After this command, for example, the phone book After this command, a telephone number can be
PHONE BOOK can be repeated back to you, a voice entry for the DIAL NUMBER entered to establish a connection with the reques-
contact can be updated or deleted, etc. ted party.
CALL REGISTER Lists of dialled numbers, missed calls, etc. REDIAL The last selected telephone number is selected.
After this command, a telephone number can be The system reads out contacts from the telephone
READ ADDRESS BOOK
DIAL NUMBER entered to establish a connection with the reques- book.
ted party. The system reads the messages which were re-
After this command the system calls the last dial- READ MESSAGES ceived while the telephone was connected to the
REDIAL
led number. control unit.
Play music from the mobile phone or another The help is significantly reduced (good operating
MUSICa) SHORT DIALOGUE
paired device. knowledge provided).
After this command the system offers additional LONG DIALOGUE The help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).
FURTHER OPTIONS
context-dependent commands. CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth®, dialogue etc.
If the system does not recognise the command, it repeats the first part of the
CANCEL The dialogue is ended. help thus enabling a new entry to be completed. After the 2nd unsuccessful
a) On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga- attempt the system repeats the second part of the help. After the 3rd unsuc-
tion system menu; refer to the » Operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system. cessful attempt the answer “Cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Pardon?”, and a Store voice recording of a contact
new entry can be made. After the 2nd unsuccessful attempt, the system re- If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you
peats the help. After the 3rd unsuccessful attempt the answer “Cancelled” is can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book -
given and the dialogue is ended. Voice tag - Record menu item.
Store voice recording of a contact Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you OPTIONS menu.
can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book -
Voice tag - Record menu item.
Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER
OPTIONS menu.

Communication and multimedia 133

Multimedia To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth®, you must first pair the
device with the hands-free system in the Phone - Bluetooth - Media player
 Introduction menu.
The music playback process is performed on the connected device.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played
Music playback via Bluetooth® 134
back via the hands-free system can be controlled with the remote con-
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering trol » page 133, Voice commands - GSM II.
wheel 134
AUX- and MDIinputs 135 Note
CD changer 136 The device being connected must support the Bluetooth® A2DP profile; refer
DVD-preinstallation 136 to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected.

Music playback via Bluetooth®

The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music
via Bluetooth® from devices such as MP3 players, mobile phones or notebooks.

Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel
The multifunction steering wheel has buttons for operating the basic func-
tions of factory fitted radio and navigation system » Fig. 131.
The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices.
A description is included in the relevant operating instructions.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio, au-
dio, video or navigation system.
The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons.
Fig. 131 Multifunction steering wheel: control buttons

Button/
wheel Action Radio TV Audio sources DVD video Navigation
» Fig. 131
1 Press Change audio source
Interrupt current
2 Press Switch tone off/on (MUTE ) navigation an-
nouncement
2 Turn upwards Increase volume 

134 Operation
 Button/
wheel Action Radio TV Audio sources DVD video Navigation
» Fig. 131
2 Turn downwards Decrease volume
Skip to next chan- Skip to next chap-
Skip to next channel Skip to next track without function
3 Press briefly nel ter
Stop traffic report
Press button for a
3 long period of without function Fast forward without function
time
Switch to previous Switch to start of Switch to previous
Switch to previous channel without function
4 Press briefly channel tracka) chapter
Stop traffic report
Press button for a
4 long period of without function Fast rewind without function
time
Switch to the previous station and at the
Skip to next chan- Skip to next chap- Show the option
5 Turn upwards same time Skip to next track
nel ter to stop naviga-
display list of saved/available stations
tion or display
Switch to the next station and at the same the list of recent
Switch to previous Switch to start of Switch to previous
5 Turn downwards time destinations
channel tracka) chapter
display list of saved/available stations
6 Press briefly Call up the main menu
a) To go to the previous track, press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions.

AUX- and MDIinputs For a description of use, refer to the relevant operating instructions for the ra-
dio or navigation system.
The AUX and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources (e.g. iPod
or mp3 player) and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted
radio or navigation system.
The AUX input for external audio sources is located below the armrest of the
front seats and is marked with the symbol. 1) .
The MDI input is located in the storage compartment below the front armrest.

1) For vehicles with the navigation system Amundsen + the AUX input located on the front panel of the
navigation device » manual of the navigation system Amundsen +.

Communication and multimedia 135

CD changer All CDs in the CD changer are ejected consecutively.
Note
Fig. 132 ■ Insert a CD, with the labelled side facing up, into the CD slot B » Fig. 132
The CD changer until it is automatically drawn in. The play function will start automatically.
■ After loading a CD into the CD changer, wait until the warning light of the
corresponding button D is illuminated. Then the CD case B is free to load the
next CD.
■ If a position is selected, on which a CD is already located, this CD is ejected.
Remove the ejected CD and load the desired CD.

DVD-preinstallation
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the right side
compartment of the boot.
Inserting the CD
› Touch the button C » Fig. 132 and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CD
case B .
The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD chang-
er. The warning light in the corresponding button D stops flashing.
Filling the CD changer with CDs
› Press and hold the button C » Fig. 132 for longer than 2 seconds and guide
the CDs one after the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case B . Fig. 133 Seat backrest - left front seat/right front seat
The warning lights in the buttons D stop flashing.
DVD preinstallation » Fig. 133
Inserting a CD at a specific position
A Openings for attachment of DVD player holder
› Press the button C » Fig. 132. B Audio/video input
The warning lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are al- C Connection input, DVD player
ready assigned and flash in the case of free memory spaces.
Only one DVD preinstallation is factory-installed in the seat backrest of the
› Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD case B .
front seat.
Ejecting a CD The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from ŠKODA original
› Press the button A » Fig. 132 to eject a CD. accessories. For a description of the use, refer to the operating instructions for
For assigned memory spaces, the warning lights now illuminates in the but- these devices and equipment. 
tons D .
› Press the corresponding button D . The CD is ejected.

Ejecting all CDs

› Press and hold the button A » Fig. 132 for more than 2 seconds to eject the
CDs.

136 Operation
 WARNING
■ If there are passengers on the rear seats, the DVD player holder must not
be used on its own (without the DVD player) - risk of injury!
■ The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three pre-set positions.
Be careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when
changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made.
■ The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or
the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely.

Note
Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player
holder/DVD player.

Communication and multimedia 137

 WARNING
Driving
■ Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The en-
gine's exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon
Starting off and Driving monoxide, a poisonous gas – risk of death.
■ Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
Starting and stopping the engine using the key
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cleaning cloths or tools) in the engine com-

 Introduction partment. This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■ Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: cover) – risk of fire!
Electronic immobilizer 139
Ignition Switch 139 CAUTION
Starting the engine 139 ■ The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the
vehicle is at a standstill. The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is
Stopping the engine 140
activated when the engine is running 3 » Fig. 134 on page 139.
Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY sys- ■ Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
tem » page 140. catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid » page 211, Jump-starting.
The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after CAUTION
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem. ■ Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads before the
engine has reached its operating temperature – risk of damaging the engine!
WARNING ■ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
■ When the vehicle is travelling with the engine off, the ignition key must engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
always be in position 2 » Fig. 134 on page 139 (ignition switched on). This run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula-
position is confirmed by the appearance of certain indicator lamps in the in- tion of heat when the engine is switched off.
strument cluster.
■ If the key is not in position 2, it could unexpectedly lock the steering - For the sake of the environment
danger of accident! Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
■ Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine rea-
come to a complete stop (by applying the handbrake). Otherwise, the steer- ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are
ing could be blocked – risk of accident! lower.
■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the Note
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents! After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan can intermittently continue to
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is operate for approx. 10 minutes.
risk of accident, damage or theft!
■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!

138 Driving
Electronic immobilizer If the steering is locked and the key cannot be turned or can only be turned
with difficulty to position 2 » Fig. 134, move the steering wheel back and
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. forth and the steering lock will unlock.

An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deac- Note
tivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle. This
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car.
withdrawn from the lock.
Starting the engine
The engine will not start if a non-authorized ignition key is used.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.  Read and observe and on page 138 first.

 Immobilizer active. Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The glow
 IMMOBILIZER plug warning light  illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Start
the engine once the  warning light has gone out.
Ignition Switch You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Fig. 134 Procedure for starting the engine
Positions of the vehicle key in › Firmly apply the handbrake.
the ignition lock › Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position
P or N.
› Switch on the ignition 2 » Fig. 134 on page 139.
› Depress and hold the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake
pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) until the engine starts.
› Turn the key to position 3 to the stop and release immediately the engine
has started – do not depress the accelerator.
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. After letting go, the vehicle key will return to position 2 .
Petrol engines » Fig. 134 If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Re-
1 Ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked peat the start-up process after approx. half a minute.
2 Ignition switched on Vehicles with manual transmission
3 Starting engine The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed.
Diesel engines » Fig. 134 The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
1 Fuel supply interrupted, ignition switched off, engine switched off, the  Depress clutch to start.
steering can be locked.  CLUTCH 
2 Heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
3 Starting engine
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel
until the steering locking pin engages audibly.

Starting off and Driving 139

Vehicles with automatic transmission1) The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Exit System, hereinafter referred to only as
system) allows the switching on or switching off of the ignition and starting or
The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed.
stopping of the engine without the active use of the key.
The following message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
A key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering, switch on the ignition and
 Depress the brake to start. start the vehicle. When travelling the key must be in the vehicle.
 BRAKE The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
CAUTION starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
■ If the engine does not start-up after a second attempt, one of the following WARNING
fuses may be defective. ■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
■ Petrol engine - fuse for the electric fuel pump.
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
■ Diesel engine - fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
and fuel pump. ■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
■ Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 220, or seek assistance from
risk of theft etc!
a specialist garage. ■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
Stopping the engine
 Read and observe and on page 138 first. WARNING
■ Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The en-
Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key to position 1 » Fig. 134 on gine's exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon
page 139. monoxide, a poisonous gas – risk of death.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed ■ Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death.
if the selector lever is in position P.
CAUTION
Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY ■ The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been forgotten, for ex-
ample, in the front of the vehicle roof D » Fig. 34 on page 53 - There is danger
 Introduction of loss or damage to the key! It is therefore not always necessary to know
where the key is.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the
Steering lock / unlock 141 vehicle is at a standstill. The starter or engine may be damaged if the starter is
Ignition on/off 141 activated when the engine is running.
■ Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
Starting the engine 142
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
Switching off the engine 142 start aid » page 211, Jump-starting. 
Emergency start-up of the engine 142
Emergency ignition shutoff system 143

1) Applies to vehicles with START STOP system.

140 Driving
 CAUTION › Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button » Fig. 135.
■ Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads before the › Open the driver door.
engine has reached its operating temperature – risk of damaging the engine! The steering is locked automatically.
■ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the
run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula- steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked.
tion of heat when the engine is switched off. Unlocking
For the sake of the environment
› Open the driver's door and get into the vehicle.
› Close the driver's door.
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine rea- The steering is unlocked within 2 seconds.
ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are If the system does not unlock the steering at the first time (for example when
lower. the front wheels are in contact with an obstacle), then two more unlocking at-
tempts are performed automatically.
Note
■ The system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while If the steering is still not unlocked, then the following message is displayed on
driving, this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen- the display of the instrument cluster.
cy » page 143.  Move the steering wheel!
■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan can intermittently continue
 MOVE STEERING WHEEL
to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
■ Under certain circumstances (e.g. after switching off the ignition and opening Slightly move the steering wheel and the system will make up to 3 more at-
the driver's door), the steering is enabled only when the ignition is switched on tempts to unlock after 2 seconds. At the same time, the warning light  flash-
or the engine is started. es.
If the steering is still not unlocked, to try to eliminate the possible cause and
Steering lock / unlock then repeat the unlocking attempt.

Fig. 135 Ignition on/off

Starter button
 Read and observe and on page 140 first.

› Press the starter button » Fig. 135 on page 141 briefly.

The ignition is switched on or off.
On vehicles fitted with a manual transmission, the clutch pedal must not be
depressed while switching the ignition on or off, otherwise the system would
try to start.
 Read and observe and on page 140 first.
On vehicles fitted with a automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be
The steering lock (steering lock) deters attempted theft of your vehicle. depressed while switching the ignition on or off, otherwise the system would
try to start. 
Locking
› Stop the vehicle.

Starting off and Driving 141

If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is on, an audible signal sounds Switching off the engine
and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display.
 Ignition on!  Read and observe and on page 140 first.
 IGNITION SWITCHED ON › Stop the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always switch off the ignition. › Press the starter button » Fig. 135 on page 141 briefly.
The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously.
Note
The ignition is switched on when indicated by the illuminating of certain indi- The engine can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km/h.
cator lamps in the instrument cluster.
Emergency start-up of the engine
Starting the engine
Fig. 136
 Read and observe and on page 140 first. Emergency start-up of engine
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The glow
plug warning light  illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Start
the engine once the  warning light has gone out.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Procedure for starting the engine
› Firmly apply the handbrake.  Read and observe and on page 140 first.
› Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position
P or N. If the authorisation check for the key fails, the following message appears in
› Depress and hold the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake the instrument cluster display.
pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) until the engine starts.  Key not found.
› Press and hold » Fig. 135 on page 141 1)the starter button until the engine  NO KEY
starts.
The emergency start-up must be completed.
CAUTION › Press the starter button directly with the key » Fig. 136.
■ If the engine does not start-up after a second attempt, one of the following
fuses may be defective. or
■ Petrol engine - fuse for the electric fuel pump. › Press the starter button and then hold the key to the starter button.
■ Diesel engine - fuse for the control unit for glow plugs or glow plug relay
and fuel pump. Note
■ Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 220, or seek assistance from During an emergency engine start-up, the key bit must face the starter but-
a specialist garage. ton » Fig. 136.

1) On vehicles with the START STOP system, it is sufficient to press the starter button briefly. The motor
will then automatically start.

142 Driving
Emergency ignition shutoff system CAUTION
■ Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads » page 149.
 Read and observe and on page 140 first. ■ Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not
necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer
The ignition can be turned off in an emergency even when travelling at a
braking distance and excessive wear.
speed of more than 2 km / hr.
› Press the starter button » Fig. 135 on page 141 for longer than 1 second or Information on braking
twice within 1 second.
 Read and observe and on page 143 first.
After emergency stop of the ignition, the steering is unlocked.
If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con-
Brakes siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic, the brake light
flashes automatically.
 Introduction After the speed was reduced below around 10 km/h or the vehicle was stop-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system
switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically af-
Information on braking 143 ter accelerating or driving off again.
Handbrake 144
Before travelling a long distance down a steep gradient, reduce speed and
WARNING shift into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will
■ Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch- be used, reducing the load on the brakes. Any additional braking should be
ed off – risk of accident! completed intermittently, not continuously.
■ The clutch pedal must be depressed when braking on a vehicle with man- Wear-and-tear
ual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise, The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv-
the function of the brake booster may be impaired – risk of accident! ing style.
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who might, for example,
release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear unattended in the ve- The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns
hicle. The vehicle could then start to move – risk of accident! and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted.
Under these severe conditions, the thickness of the brake pads must also be
WARNING checked by a specialist garage between services.
In the case of damage to the standard fitted front spoiler or if retrofitting Wet roads or road salt
another front spoiler, hub caps etc.» page 173, Services, modifications and The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake
technical alterations, make sure that the air supply to the front brakes is pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter.
not affected. The front brakes may overheat, which can have a negative im- The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times.
pact on the functioning of the braking system – there is a risk of an acci-
dent! Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads occur if the vehicle has
been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking
system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times. 

Starting off and Driving 143

Faults in the brake surface The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that
 Release parking brake!
the brake pedal can be depressed further, the brake system may be faulty.
The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more
Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri-
than around 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
ately as you will not know the exact extent of the damage.
Low brake fluid level WARNING
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically » page 35,  Brake sys- is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can
tem. have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system – there is a
risk of an accident.
Brake booster
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
CAUTION
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
After the vehicle has come to a standstill, always tighten the handbrake first
and then select the first gear (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or move the se-
Handbrake
lector lever to the P-position (vehicles with an automatic gearbox).

Fig. 137
Handbrake Manual gear changing and pedals

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manual gear changing 144
Pedals 145

Manual gear changing

 Read and observe and on page 143 first.

Apply Fig. 138

› Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards. Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or
6 gear manual gearbox
Releasing
› Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking
button » Fig. 137.
› Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning light  illuminates when the handbrake is applied,
provided the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
handbrake applied. on the clutch.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 43. 

144 Driving
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the clutch WARNING
pedal and hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before reverse gear is engag- ■ Do not depress the accelerator if the forward driving mode is changed
ed to avoid any shift noises. when the vehicle is halted and the engine is running – there is a risk of an
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the accident.
ignition is on. ■ Never shift the selector lever to R or P modes when driving – there is a
risk of an accident.
WARNING ■ The vehicle must be held on the brake pedal in D, S or R modes if the ve-
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident! hicle is halted and the engine is running. Even when the engine is idling,
power transmission is never completely interrupted – the vehicle will creep.
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gearshift CAUTION
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mech- ■ If the selector lever is shifted to N while the vehicle is being driven you must
anism to wear excessively. lift off the accelerator pedal and you will need to wait until the engine has
reached its idling speed before shifting the selector lever to a forward driving
Pedals mode again.
■ At temperatures below -10 °C, the engine can only be started in selector lev-
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances! er position P.
■ Never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal when stopping on a
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corre-
sponding attachment points, may be used. hill – this may lead to transmission damage.

Only use footmats from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories, which are fit- Note
ted to two attachment points. After the ignition is switched off, the ignition key can only be withdrawn when
the selector lever is in position P.
WARNING
No objects are allowed in the driver's footwell – risk of obstruction or limi- Modes and use of selector lever
tation in operating the pedals!

Automatic transmission

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Modes and use of selector lever 145
Manual gear shifting (Tiptronic) 146
Starting off and driving 147
Malfunction 148 Fig. 139 Selector lever/display 

Starting off and Driving 145

 Releasing selector lever from P or N modes (selector lever lock)
Fig. 140 The selector lever is locked in the P and N modes to prevent the forwards trav-
Shift lock button el mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion.
The  warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster » page 41.
The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while simultane-
ously pressing the lock button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140.
The selector lever is not locked when shifted quickly through N (e.g. from R to
D). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, e.g. in a bank of
snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more
than approximately 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed.
 Read and observe and on page 145 first.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected up to 5 km/h.
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 139.
Note
The following modes can be selected with the selector lever » Fig. 139.
If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa,
P – Parking mode move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being selec-
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode. ted accidentally.
Parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary.
Manual gear shifting (Tiptronic)
R - Reverse gear
Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en-
gine is at idling speed.
Before moving into mode R from mode P or N, depress the brake pedal while
simultaneously pressing the lock button in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 140.
N - Neutral
Power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode.
D - Mode for forwards travel (normal programme)
In mode D, the forward gears are automatically changed according to the en-
gine load, accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed. Fig. 141 Selector lever/multi function steering wheel

S - Mode for forwards travel (sports programme)  Read and observe and on page 145 first.
In mode S, the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher
engine speeds than in mode D. Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev-
er or multifunction steering wheel. This mode can be selected both while hal-
Before changing to mode S from mode D , the shift lock button must be press-
ted and while driving.
ed in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the » Fig. 139 on page 145 display.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 43. 

146 Driving
Switching to manual shifting › Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
› Push the gear selector from position D towards the right, or left in a right- Stop
hand drive vehicle.
› Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
Shifting up gears › Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed.
› Press the selector lever forwards + » Fig. 141. The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
› Pull the right-hand paddle + » Fig. 141 briefly towards the steering wheel. short time, such as at a cross roads.
Shifting down gears
Parking
› Press the selector lever backwards - » Fig. 141. › Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
› Pull the left-hand paddle - » Fig. 141 briefly towards the steering wheel. › Firmly apply the handbrake.
Temporarily switching to manual gear shifting in mode D or S › Press the lock button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140 on page 146and
› Pull one of the - / + paddles » Fig. 141 briefly towards the steering wheel . keep pressing.
Manual gear shifting is deactivated if more than 1 minute passes after either of
› Move the selector lever into the position P and then release the locking but-
ton.
the - / + paddles was pulled. The temporary switch to manual gear shifting can
also be deactivated by pulling the right-hand + paddle towards the steering Launch control1)
wheel for more than 1 second. The launch control function allows the vehicle in mode S or Tiptronic to reach
its maximum acceleration when starting off.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. › Disable the ASR » page 154, Brake assist systems.
If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no
› START STOP deactivate » page 164.
risk of the engine over revving.
› Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot.
› Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
Note › Release the brake pedal.
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual The vehicle starts off with maximum acceleration.
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and Reactivate the ASR and START STOP when the desired speed has been
hence brake wear » page 143. reached.

Starting off and driving Kickdown

The kickdown function allows you to achieve maximum acceleration by your
 Read and observe and on page 145 first. vehicle while driving.
Starting off When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the kickdown function is activa-
› Start the engine. ted in any forward driving mode.
› Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal. The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed
› Press the lock button in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 140 on page 146and and engine speed, and the vehicle accelerates.
keep pressing.
› Move the selector lever into the desired position » page 145 and then release The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has
the lock button. reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range. 

1) This function is only valid for some engines.

Starting off and Driving 147

 WARNING New engine
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of control
of the vehicle – there is a risk of an accident. The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Malfunction › Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use, which
means 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.
 Read and observe and on page 145 first. › No full throttle.
› Avoid high engine speeds.
Emergency programme › Do not tow a trailer.
The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in
the automatic gearbox system. From 1,000 up to 1,500 kilometres
Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the
Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following: gear engaged, which means up to the maximum permissible engine speed.
› Only certain gears are selected.
› Reverse gear R cannot be used. The red scale on the rev counter indicates the range in which the system be-
› Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible. gins to limit the engine speed.

Gearbox overheating During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than
The gearbox may, for example, become too hot due to frequent repeated later until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you
starting or stop-and-go traffic. Overheating is indicated by the warning adopt during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the suc-
light » page 33,  Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot. cess of running in your car.

Defective selector lever lock Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in pe-
If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted (e.g. dis- riod.
charged vehicle battery, faulty fuse), the selector lever can no longer be moved On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, at the very latest shift up into the
out of position P in the normal manner, and the vehicle can no longer be driv- next gear when the red area is reached. Observe the recommended
en. The selector lever must be emergency released » page 217. gear » page 43, Gear recommendation. Very high engine speeds when acceler-
ating (accelerator) are automatically restricted » .
Note
Visit a specialist workshop if the gearbox has switched to the emergency pro- In vehicles with manual transmission, do not drive at unnecessarily low engine
gramme. speeds. Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly. Ob-
serve the recommended gear » page 43, Gear recommendation.

Running in CAUTION
■ The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting
 Introduction down at the wrong time. This can result in a sudden increase in revs beyond
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: the permissible maximum rpm and hence engine damage.
■ Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in
New engine 148 individual gears.
New tyres 149
New brake pads 149 For the sake of the environment
Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds. Shifting up sooner helps
save fuel, reduces engine noise and protects the environment.

148 Driving
New tyres Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond
the driver's control. Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult
New tyres must firstly be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. conditions, on poor roads, etc.
Therefore, drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so. Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer's data, as a re-
sult of outside temperatures, the weather and driving style.
New brake pads
The optimal engine speed should be maintained when accelerating, to avoid a
New brake pads do not initially provide optimal braking performance. They first high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.
need to be “run in”. Therefore, drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so. CAUTION
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at
its normal operating temperature.
Economical driving and environmental sustainability

 Introduction Looking ahead

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:  Read and observe on page 149 first.
Looking ahead 149 A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating, therefore un-
Economical gear changing. 149 necessary accelerating and braking should be avoided. If looking ahead when
Avoiding full throttle 150 driving, less braking and consequently less accelerating are required.
Reducing idling 150 If possible, let your vehicle coast to a stop, or use the engine brake, if you can
Avoiding short distances 150 see that the next set of traffic lights is on red, for example.
Checking tyre pressure 150
Avoiding unnecessary ballast 151 Economical gear changing.
Regular maintenance 151
Saving electrical energy 151 Fig. 142
Environmental compatibility 151 Principle sketch: Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km depending
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the
on the selected gear
vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. ŠKODA places a
particular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment.
It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to
make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and the wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors:  Read and observe on page 149 first.
› Your personal driving style
› Operating conditions Shifting up early saves on fuel.
› Technical requirements Manual gearbox
The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 - 15 % by always looking ahead › Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.
and driving in an economical way. › Shift up into the next gear at approximately 2,000 rpm. 

Starting off and Driving 149

An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. Observe In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system, turn off the engine
the recommended gear » page 43, Gear recommendation. when in a traffic jam, at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times.
A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption » Fig. 142. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is nee-
ded when you start the engine up again.
Automatic gearbox
› Slowly apply the accelerator pedal. However, do not depress it as far as the If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operat-
kickdown position » page 147. ing temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particu-
› An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator larly high in the warming-up phase. Therefore, start driving as soon as the en-
pedal is only depressed slowly. gine has started, In this case high engine speeds should be avoided.

Avoiding full throttle Avoiding short distances

Fig. 143 Fig. 144

Principle sketch: Fuel consump- Principle sketch: Fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km. and speed tion in l/100 km at different tem-
in km/h. peratures

 Read and observe on page 149 first.  Read and observe on page 149 first.

Driving more slowly saves fuel. Short distances result in above-average high fuel consumption. We therefore
recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold.
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel con-
sumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start. Fuel con-
your vehicle. sumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The consumption sta-
The maximum speed of your vehicle should, as far possible, never be used. bilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating
Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase dispropor- temperature.
tionally at high speeds. An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
The graph » Fig. 143 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your graph » Fig. 144 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a
vehicle. Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three-quarters of certain distance at a temperature of +20 °C and a temperature of -10 °C.
the possible top speed of your vehicle.
Checking tyre pressure
Reducing idling  Read and observe on page 149 first.
 Read and observe on page 149 first.
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel. 

Idling also costs fuel.

150 Driving
Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct » page 198. If the pressure For the sake of the environment
is too low, the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance. This will ■ Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthet-
not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behav- ic low viscosity oils.
iour will worsen. ■ Regularly check the ground under the vehicle. Have your vehicle inspected by
Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the
ground.
Avoiding unnecessary ballast Note
 Read and observe on page 149 first. We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a ŠKODA
service partner.
Transporting ballast costs fuel.
Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption. Therefore we rec- Saving electrical energy
ommend carrying no unnecessary weight.
 Read and observe on page 149 first.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the
vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical
of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an in- power. If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on,
crease in fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres. more fuel is needed to operate the alternator. We therefore recommend
switching off electrical components if these are no longer required.
At a speed of 100 - 120 km/h, a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member
without a load will use about 10 % more fuel than normal due to the increased
aerodynamic drag.
Environmental compatibility
 Read and observe on page 149 first.
Regular maintenance
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, material selec-
 Read and observe on page 149 first. tion and production of your new ŠKODA. Particular emphasis has been placed
on the following points.
A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel.
Design measures
By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage, you create
the conditions needed for economical driving. The maintenance state of your
› Joints designed to be easily detached.
vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention
› Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system.
› Improved purity of different classes of materials.
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 % higher › Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation
than normal. 260.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, e.g. when filling up. Oil consumption is › Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2.
dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil › Minimum fuel leakage during accidents.
consumption could be as high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style › Reduced noise.
of driving. Choice of materials
It is quite normal that a new engine has higher oil consumption at first, and › Extensive use of recyclable material.
reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. The oil consump- › Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant.
tion of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving › No cadmium. 

about 5,000 km.

Starting off and Driving 151

› No asbestos. General information
› Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.
Manufacture Pay attention to low-slung parts of the vehicle, such as the spoiler and ex-
› Solvent-free cavity protection. haust, particularly in the following situations.
› Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production › When driving on poorly maintained roads and paths.
plant to the customer. › When driving over kerbs.
› The use of solvent-free adhesives. › When driving on steep ramps, etc.
› No CFCs used in the production process. Particular attention is required for vehicles with sport suspension and when
› Without use of mercury. the vehicle is fully laden.
› Use of water-soluble paints.
Trade-in and recycling of old cars Driving through water on streets
ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to
protecting the environment and the preserving resources. All new ŠKODAvehi- Fig. 145
cles can be recycled by up to 95 % and can always 1)be returned free of charge. Maximum permissible water lev-
In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been created, where you el when driving through water
can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will receive a
confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regula-
tions.

Note
You can find more detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old
cars from a specialist garage. The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
Avoiding damage to your vehicle › Determine the depth of the water before driving through it.
 Introduction The water level must not reach above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 145.

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: › Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed.
General information 152 At a higher speed, a water wave can form in front of the vehicle, which can
cause water to penetrate into the engine's air intake system or other parts of
Driving through water on streets 152
the vehicle.
› Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off. 

1) Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.

152 Driving
 WARNING Unleaded petrol
■ Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can impair the braking power and
extend the braking distance – risk of accident! A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded
■ Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings. petrol » page 184, Unleaded petrol. Information regarding the locations of fill-
■ After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and ing stations that offer unleaded petrol is, for example, provided by the auto-
dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for mobile associations.
the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions
permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy. Headlights
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side
CAUTION of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent.
■ Should water penetrate into the intake system of the engine, there is a
threat of serious damage being incurred by the engine parts! When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the
■ When driving through water, some vehicle parts such as chassis, electrics or road than in your home country, the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle on-
transmissions can be severely damaged. coming drivers. In order to avoid this, the headlights must be adjusted at a
■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis- specialist garage.
sible water level for your vehicle. Headlights with Xenon lights can be adjusted in the menu of the MAXI DOT
■ Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water, making it difficult or display » page 71.
impossible to drive through water.
■ Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. A vehicle Note
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa- You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist
ter. garage.

Note
After driving through water, we recommend having the vehicle checked by a
specialist garage.

Driving abroad

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unleaded petrol 153
Headlights 153
In certain countries, it may be possible that the ŠKODA Partner network is limi-
ted or has not been established. This is the reason why procuring certain spare
parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able
to make limited repairs.

Starting off and Driving 153

Assist systems Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Brake assist systems Fig. 146

ESC system: ASR button
 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 154
Antilock brake system (ABS) 155
Traction Control System (ASR) 155
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 155
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) 155  Read and observe and on page 154 first.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) 155
Hill Hold Control (HHC) 156 The ESC system helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it
is being operated at its dynamic limits, such as a sudden change to the direc-
WARNING tion of travel. Depending on the road surface conditions, the risk of skidding is
■ A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to reduced, thereby improving the vehicle's driving stability .
shut down. The brake assist systems would then fail to function – risk of The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched
accident! on.
■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. The increased safety provided by the brake assist The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the
systems must not tempt you to take safety risks – risk of accident! steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with
■ In the event of an ABS fault, visit a specialist garage immediately. Adjust the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the car begin-
your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS, as you will not ning to skid, the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel.
know the exact extent of the damage or the extent to which this is limiting During an intervention of the system, the warning light  flashes in the instru-
the braking efficiency. ment cluster.
The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control
CAUTION (ESC).
■ All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufac- › Antilock Brake System (ABS) » page 155.
turer to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly. › Traction control (ASR) » page 155.
■ Changes to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, brakes, chassis) can influence the › Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) » page 155.
functionality of the brake assist systems » page 173, Services, modifications › Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) » page 155.
and technical alterations. › Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) » page 155.
■ If a fault occurs in the ABS system, the ESC, ASR and EDL will also not work. › Hill Hold Control (HHC) » page 156.
An ABS fault is indicated with the warning light  » page 38. › Trailer stabilisation (TSA) » page 172.
The ESC system cannot be deactivated. The  » Fig. 146 button can only be
used to deactivate the ASR.
The  warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the ASR is de-
activated.

154 Driving
Antilock brake system (ABS) The ASR should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactiva-
ted only in the following situations, for example.
 Read and observe and on page 154 first. › When driving with snow chains.
› When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thereby, it helps the driver to › When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
maintain control of the vehicle.
The ASR can be deactivated via the  » Fig. 147symbol button.
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises. The  warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the ASR is de-
activated.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres-
sure on the brake pedal. Ensure the ASR is activated again afterwards.

Traction Control System (ASR) Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)

 Read and observe and on page 154 first.
Fig. 147
ASR button If one of the wheels starts to spin, the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel
and transfers the driving force to the other wheels. This ensures the stability
of the vehicle and a quick journey.
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation
in the disc brake of the wheel being braked. The vehicle can continue to be
driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL. The
EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.

 Read and observe and on page 154 first. Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
If the wheels are slipping, the ASR system adapts the engine speed to the con-  Read and observe and on page 154 first.
ditions of the road surface. The ASR makes it much easier to start off, acceler-
ate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfav- In critical situations, the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommenda-
ourable. tion in order to stabilise the vehicle. The DSR is activated, for example, on the
right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces.
The ASR function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched
on. Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system, the ASR is integrated into the ESC
system » page 154.
 Read and observe and on page 154 first.

During an intervention of the system, the ASR warning light  flashes in the HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance.
instrument cluster. The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap-
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
The HBA function is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is re-
leased. 

Assist systems 155

The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the CAUTION
HBA. ■ If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system
and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The
Hill Hold Control (HHC) fault is also indicated by the symbol flashing in the button » Fig. 148 on
page 157. Seek help from a specialist garage.
 Read and observe and on page 154 first. ■ The sensors must be kept clean (free of ice, etc.) to enable the system to op-

When driving on slopes, HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake ped- erate properly.
■ Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or
al to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake.
high temperatures etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recog-
The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake nition of obstacle”.
pedal for approx. 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released. ■ Additionally installed accessories such as e.g. bicycle carriers can impair the
The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator ped- system function.
al. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
Note
HHC is active on slopes of >5 % when the driver door is closed. HHC is always ■ The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
only active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving down- than for rear obstacle recognition.
hill, it is inactive. ■ If not all fields around the vehicle are shown after the system is activated,
the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or in reverse.
Parking aid ■ The sound of the park assist can be adjusted via the MAXI DOT display in the
Assistants menu option » page 47.
 Introduction ■ If the system is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is
in position P (the vehicle cannot move), the warning tone is interrupted and no
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: obstacles are displayed.
Function 157
Activation/deactivation 157
WARNING
■ The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the
vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres. Pay particular attention to small
children and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ Before reversing, you should make sure that there are no small obstacles,
such as rocks, thin posts, trailer drawbars etc. in front or behind your vehi-
cle. Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. Thus, these objects or people
who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors.
■ External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system. Un-
der adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people to not be recog-
nised by the system.

156 Driving
 Function The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing
device. The danger area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles
equipped with a factory fitted towing device.
Towing a trailer
On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device, only system areas A
and B » Fig. 148 are active when towing a trailer.

Activation/deactivation
 Read and observe and on page 156 first.

The system is automatically activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing

Fig. 148 Range of sensors / system button the symbol button  » Fig. 148 on page 157. The symbol  illuminates in the
button; activation is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal.
 Read and observe and on page 156 first. The system is deactivated by moving out of reverse gear, either by pressing
the symbol button or automatically at a speed exceeding 10 km/h (the sym-
The parking aid (referred to below solely as system) only works when the igni-
bol  in the button goes out).
tion is switched on.
On vehicles which only have rear sensors, the system can only be deactivated
The system supports the driver via audible signals, via the display on the radio
by moving out of reverse gear.
or via the factory-installed navigation system when parking and manoeu-
vring » Radio user guide, Navigation system user guide.
Park assist
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasound sensors are located on the front/rear  Introduction
bumper.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Image description - approximate range of the sensors
Functioning 158
Range » Fig. 148 Range of sensors
Finding a parking space 158
A 120 cm Parking 159
B 60 cm Departing from a parallel parking space 160
C 160 cm Automatic emergency braking 160
D 60 cm Information messages 160
E a)
60 cm Park Assist (in the following referred to as the system) helps drivers park in
a) Applies only for vehicles with 12 sensors. suitable parallel and perpendicular parking places and also to manoeuvre out
of parallel parking spaces.
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm - danger The system takes over the steering movements when parking or driving out of
area. From this moment on do not continue driving! the parking space, the driver operates the pedals as well as the gear lever.
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
as parking operation. 

Assist systems 157

The parking aid is part of the park assist system, therefore the information Functioning
and safety guidelines » page 156, Parking aid must also be read and ob-
served.  Read and observe and on page 158 first.

WARNING Basic system operations

■ The system only serves as an assistance and does not relieve the driver › The measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving.
of the responsibility for the vehicle operation. › The determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking.
■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid › The calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between parking space or forwards from the parking space.
the steering wheel spokes – risk of injury! › Automatic rotation of the front wheels during the parking.
■ During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
The display of the instrument cluster (hereinafter only in the display) informa-
ice, etc.) you may stray from the calculated road because of the surface tion and system messages are displayed.
conditions. Therefore we suggest that you do not use the system in such
situations. When the system is activated, the warning light illuminates  » Fig. 149 on
■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors. Un- page 158 - .
der adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people to not be recog- The traction control system (ASR) must always be switched on when parking.
nised by the system.
Finding a parking space
CAUTION
■ If other vehicles are parked behind the kerb or on it, the system can also
guide your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it. Ensure that the wheels or the
wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time.
■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces or structures of certain objects such
as wire mesh fences or powder snow cannot be recognised by the system.
■ Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or
high temperatures etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recog-
nition of obstacle”.

CAUTION
The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de- Fig. 149 System button / display
pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size  Read and observe and on page 158 first.
approved by the manufacturer.
■ Do without the use of the system if snow chains or a spare wheel is moun- Finding a parallel parking space
ted. › Drive past the parking space at up to 40 km/h and a distance of 0.5 – 1.5 m.
■ If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted, the › Press the symbol buttononce  » Fig. 149 .
resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This The display shows the following » Fig. 149 - .
can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.
Finding a perpendicular parking space
Note › Drive past the parking space at up to 20 km/h and a distance of 0.5 – 1.5 m.
We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km / h. › Press the symbol buttontwice  » Fig. 149 . 

158 Driving
The display shows the following » Fig. 149 - . If the system has recognised a suitable parking space, this parking space is
shown in the display » Fig. 150 - .
The search area for the parking space on the driver's side is automatically indi-
cated on the display. › Continue driving forwards until the display appears » Fig. 150 - .
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to park on this side of
› Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until
the parking procedure starts.
the road. In the display the search area for the parking space is indicated on
the driver's side.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
› As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. ac-
If suitable parking space is found, its parameters are stored until another suit- tive. Monitor area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering
able parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven will be taken over by the system.
after finding the parking space. › Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
If the driver changes the parking mode while searching for a parking space, the If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps.
symbol button  must be pressed again.
› If the arrow in the display flashes forward » Fig. 150 - , then select the
Note 1st gear or move the selector lever into position D.
If the symbol  (km / h) is shown in the display , the vehicle speed should be The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
reduced below 40 km / hr (parallel parking) or below 20 km / hr (Transverse
parking) .
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro-
tates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
› Carefully drive forwards.
Parking › If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display » Fig. 150 - , select reverse
gear again or move the selector lever into position R .
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
› Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro-
tates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
› Carefully move backwards.
You can repeat these steps several times in succession.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the display.
 Park Assist stopped. Take over steering!
Fig. 150 Display
Automatic brake assist when speeding
 Read and observe and on page 158 first. If a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first
time, the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km /
Display h. This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting.
A Parking place recognised with the information to drive on.
Automatic termination
B Parking place recognised with the information to engage the reverse gear.
The system terminates the parking procedure if one of the following cases ari-
C Indication for selecting the forward gear. ses.
D Indication for selecting the reverse gear. › A speed of 7 km / h is exceeded for the second time.
› The time limit of 6 minutes is exceeded. 

Assist systems 159

› The system key is pressed. Automatic emergency braking
› The ASR system is turned off.
› There is a driver intervention in the automatic steering operation (wheel  Read and observe and on page 158 first.
stop).
› When there is a system fault (system temporarily not available). If the system detects a risk of collision during parking, automatic emergency
› There is an automatic emergency braking. braking takes place to prevent a collision.
If any of the above events occurs, the following message is dis- The parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
played » page 160.
CAUTION
If the parking is aborted due to the speed exceeding 7 km / h for the second
Departing from a parallel parking space
speed, then the automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system!
 Read and observe and on page 158 first.
Information messages
Manoeuvring out
› Press the symbol buttononce  » Fig. 149 on page 158 .  Read and observe and on page 158 first.
› Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out
of which you wish to manoeuvre.  Park Assist: Speed too high.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R. If a speed of 50 km / h is exceeded while searching for a parking space, the
› As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. ac- system with the key symbol is  must be reactivated.
tive. Monitor area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering
will be taken over by the system.  Speed too high. Take over steering!
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully. The parking is terminated if the speed exceeds 7 km / hr.
› Follow the system instructions shown in the display.  Driver steering intervention: Take over steering!
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention.
the following message appears in the information display:
 Take over steering and continue driving  Park Assist stopped. ASR deactivated.
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the ASR system is deac-
Automatic termination
tivated. Activate the ASR.
The system terminates the manoeuvring procedure if one of the following ca-
ses arises.  ASR deactivated. Take over steering!
› The system key is pressed. The parking procedure was ended because ASR was deactivated during the
› The ASR system is turned off. parking procedure.
› There is a driver intervention in the automatic steering operation (wheel
stop).  Trailer: Park Assist stopped.
› When there is a system fault (system temporarily not available). The parking procedure cannot be carried out because a trailer is hitched.
› There is an automatic emergency braking.
 Time limit exceeded. Take over steering!
If any of the above events occurs, the following message is dis-
played » page 160. The parking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was
passed.
 Park Assist currently not available. 

160 Driving
The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek WARNING
help from a specialist garage. ■ For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense
 Park Assist stopped. System not available right now. traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads,
loose gravel) – there is a risk of an accident.
The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle. Seek ■ The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current
help from a specialist garage. traffic conditions.
 Park Assist faulty. Workshop! ■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists in the system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
CAUTION
 ASR intervention. Take over steering! ■ The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when
The parking procedure is terminated by an ASR intervention. driving in areas with steeper gradients. The weight of the vehicle increases the
speed at which it travels. In such cases, select a lower gear or slow the vehicle
 PARK ASSIST Turn on turn signal and select reverse gear
using the footbrake.
The prerequisites for manoeuvring out of a parking space using the system ■ The cruise control system cannot be activated when first gear or reverse
have been met. Switch on the turn signals and shift into reverse. gear is selected (vehicles with manual transmission).
■ The cruise control system cannot be activated when the selector lever is in
 Automatic space departure not possible. Space too small.
positions P, N or R (vehicles with automatic transmission).
The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible. The parking gap ■ The Cruise Control System may automatically switch off when some brake
is too small. assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervene, when the speed exceeds maximum permis-
 Park Assist: Brake interv. Speed too high. sible engine speed, or a similar event takes place.

The speed was too high during the parking and was automatically reduced.
Activating/deactivating

Cruise Control System Fig. 151

Operating lever: Cruise control
 Introduction system controls
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating/deactivating 161
Storing and maintaining speed 162
Changing the stored speed 162
Switching off temporarily 162
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed, more than 25 km/h,  Read and observe and on page 161 first.
without you having to actuate the accelerator pedal.
Activating
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output › Move switch A » Fig. 151 into the ON position.
and braking power of the engine.
Deactivating
The  warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise con- › Move switch A » Fig. 151 into the OFF position.
trol system is switched on.

Assist systems 161

Storing and maintaining speed Switching off temporarily
 Read and observe and on page 161 first.  Read and observe and on page 161 first.

› Activate the cruise control system » page 161. The cruise control system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the
› Drive at the desired speed. switch A » Fig. 151 on page 161 into the spring-mounted CANCEL position or
› Push the rocker button B into the SET/- » Fig. 151 on page 161 position. by depressing the brake or clutch pedal.
After you have released the rocker button B from the SET/- position, the The set speed remains stored in the memory.
speed you have just stored is kept constant without having to depress the ac-
Briefly push the rocker button B into the RES/+ position in order to resume
celerator.
the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released.

Changing the stored speed

START STOP
 Read and observe and on page 161 first.
 Introduction
Increasing the speed with the rocker button B
› Push the rocker button B into the RES/+ » Fig. 151 on page 161 position. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
If the rocker button is held in the RES/+ position, the speed will increase con- Operating conditions for the system 163
tinuously. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached. The Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox 163
set speed is then stored in the memory. Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 163
Decreasing the speed using the rocker button B System related automatic start-up 164
The stored speed can be reduced by pushing the rocker switch B into the Manually deactivating/activating the system 164
SET/- » Fig. 151 on page 161 position. Information messages 164
If the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET/- position, the speed will The START STOP system (hereinafter referred to as the system) saves fuel and
decrease continuously. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reduces polluting emissions and CO 2 emissions by turning the engine off, e.g.
reached. The set speed is then stored in the memory. when stopping at traffic lights, and starting the engine again when moving off.
If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than approx. 25 km/h, the WARNING
speed is not stored and the memory is erased. Once the speed of the vehicle ■ Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.
has increased to more than approx. 25 km/h, the speed must then be stored ■ The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run-
again by pushing the rocker button B into the SET/- position.
ning.
Increasing the speed with the accelerator
› Depress the accelerator pedal.
Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
Decreasing the speed with the brake pedal
The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal, which tempora-
rily deactivates the system » page 162.

162 Driving
Operating conditions for the system Note
■ If the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in
Fig. 152 direct sunlight, it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the
MAXI DOT display: Engine is au- vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the sys-
tomatically switched off / auto- tem.
■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than approx. 30 seconds or the
matic engine cut off is not possi-
ble driver's door is opened during stop mode, the engine will have to be started
manually.
■ After the manual engine start and with a manual gearbox the automatic en-
gine shutdown can take place only when a minimum distance required for the
system function has been covered.

 Read and observe on page 162 first. Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox
For system-dependent automatic engine shutdown to work, the following  Read and observe on page 162 first.
conditions must be met.
 The driver's door is closed. In compliance with the operating conditions, automatic engine shutdown / au-
 The driver has fastened the seat belt. tomatic engine start takes place as described.
 The bonnet is closed. Automatic engine shutdown
 The driving speed exceeded 4 km/h after the last stop. › Stop the vehicle.
 No trailer is coupled. › Shift the gear lever to Neutral.
› Release the clutch pedal.
Some additional conditions for the system to function correctly cannot be in-
fluenced or recognised by the driver. Therefore, the system can react differ- Automatic engine shutdown takes place, segment display shows START STOP
ently in situations which are identical from the driver's perspective. ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT display  » Fig. 152 on
page 163.
If after stopping the car, the message UNABLE TO START STOP appears in the
segment display or in the MAXI DOT display the check mark  » Fig. 152, then Automatic engine start
the conditions for automatic engine shutdown are not met. › Depress the clutch pedal.
Running the engine is essential for the following reasons, for example. The automatic start procedure takes place again.
› The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached. Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox
› The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.  Read and observe on page 162 first.
› The current consumption is too high.
› High air conditioning capacity (high fan speed, big difference between the In compliance with the operating conditions, automatic engine shutdown / au-
desired and actual interior temperature).
tomatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shutdown
› Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal. 

Assist systems 163

Automatic engine shutdown takes place, segment display shows START STOP Manually deactivating/activating the system
ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT display  » Fig. 152 on
page 163.
Fig. 153
Automatic engine start Button for the START STOP sys-
› Release the brake pedal. tem
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Further information on automatic transmission
The automatic engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in po-
sitions P, D, S and N and in Tiptronic mode.
When the selector lever is in position P, the engine remains shut down even
after you release the brake pedal. The engine starts automatically by pressing  Read and observe on page 162 first.
the gas pedal or by moving the selector lever into a different mode and releas-
ing the brake pedal. Deactivating/activating
If the engine is off due to the automatic and the selector lever is put to the R
› Press the  button » Fig. 153.
position, then the automatic start-up of the engine. When start stop mode is deactivated, the warning light in the button illumi-
nates.
If the gear selector is moved from position R to the position D, S or N, the vehi-
cle must reach a speed of more than 10 km / h before the automatic engine Note
shutdown starts. If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
There is no automatic engine shutdown when the system detects a vehicle the automatic start process takes place.
moving due to a large steering angle.
Information messages
No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low
speed (e.g. during a traffic jam or when turning) and remains stationary after  Read and observe on page 162 first.
pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you
press the brake pedal down with more force. The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display.
 Start engine manually!
System related automatic start-up  START MANUALLY
 Read and observe on page 162 first. One of the conditions for automatic engine start is not satisfied or the driver's
seat belt is not fastened. The engine must be started manually.
When the engine is off, the system can automatically start the engine before
On vehicles with the system KESSY the ignition is turned off by the first press
the desired journey continues. Some possible reasons for this are:
of the start button, only after pressing for the second time is the start process
› The vehicle has begun to roll, e.g. on a slope. initiated.
› The brake pedal has been actuated several times.
› The current consumption is too high.  Fault: Start stop
 ERROR START-STOP
A system error is present. Seek help from a specialist garage.

164 Driving
Fatigue detection (break recommendation) If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
 Introduction Activation/deactivation
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The system can be activated/deactivated via the MAXI DOT display in the As-
sistants menu option » page 47.
Function 165
Information messages 165 Information messages
WARNING  Read and observe on page 165 first.
■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
you feel tired. In MAXI DOT display the icon appears for a few seconds  and the following
■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed. message.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.  Fatigue detected. Take a break!
■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
An audible signal is also emitted.

Note
Tyre pressure monitoring
■ In some situations, the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus
mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather condi-  Introduction
tions or poor road conditions).
■ The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Save tyre pressure values 166
Function
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to only as a sys-
 Read and observe on page 165 first. tem) monitors the tyre pressure while driving.
The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light  in the
about the steering behaviour, to take a break from driving. The system recom- instrument cluster illuminates and an audible signal sounds.
mends a break at speeds of 65-200 km/h. Information on the procedure for the notification of change of tyre inflation
After the ignition has been switched on, the system evaluates the steering be- pressure » page 40.
haviour for 15 minutes. This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
current steering behaviour. pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.
If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possi-
ble fatigue of the driver, it recommends taking a break from driving. WARNING
■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following con- bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 198.
ditions is met. ■ The system cannot warn in case of very rapid loss of tyre pressure, e.g. in
› The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off. the event of a sudden puncture.
› The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
› The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.

Assist systems 165

Save tyre pressure values Hitch and trailer
Fig. 154 Hitch
Key for storing the pressure val-
ues  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description 167
Adjusting the ready position 167
Fitting the ball head 168
Check proper fitting 168
 Read and observe on page 165 first. Removing the ball head 169
Accessories 169
Saving the tyre pressure values is undertaken as follows.
The maximum trailer drawbar load is 80 kg/h.
› Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
› Switch on the ignition. WARNING
› Press and hold the symbol button  » Fig. 154 . ■ Check that the ball head is seated correctly and is secured in the mount-
The warning light  in the instrument cluster illuminates. ing recess before starting any journey.
■ Do not use the ball head, if it is not correctly inserted into the mounting
An acoustic signal and the control indicator provide information about the
recess and secured.
storage of the tyre pressure values. ■ Do not use the towing equipment if it is damaged or incomplete.
› Release the  symbol button. ■ Do not modify or adapt the towing equipment in any way.
■ Never release the ball head while the trailer is still coupled.
The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system, if one of the follow- ■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times.
ing events occurs.
Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
› Change of tyre inflation pressure.
› Changing one or more wheels. CAUTION
› Changing position of a wheel on the vehicle.
› Illumination of the warning light  in the instrument cluster. ■ Take care with the ball bar - there is a risk of paint damage to the bumper.
■ When the tow bar is removed always place the cover onto the mounting re-
WARNING cess - there is a danger of soiling the mounting recess.
Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified in-
flation pressure » page 198. When storing incorrect pressure values, the Note
system could possibly not issue any warnings, even with a too low tyre ■ Operation and maintenance of hitch » page 180.
pressure. ■ Tow the vehicle by means of the detachable ball rod » page 214.

CAUTION
The tyre pressure values are to be saved every 10,000 km or once annually to
ensure correct system functioning.

166 Driving
Description Adjusting the ready position

Fig. 155 Carrier for the towing device / tow bar Fig. 156 Setting the ready position/ready position

 Read and observe and on page 166 first.  Read and observe and on page 166 first.

The ball head can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel well or in a com- The coupling ball bar must be set prior to installation in the standby position.
partment for the spare wheel in the luggage compartment.
If this is not in the ready position, then this must be set to the standby posi-
Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 155 tion as follows.
1 13-pin power socket › Grip the ball head below the protective cap 2 .
2 Safety eyelet › Remove the cap from the lock.
3 Mounting recess › Insert the key into the lock, so that its green marking is pointing upwards.
4 Cap
› Turn key 1 in direction of the arrow, so that the red marking is facing up-
wards » Fig. 156.
5 Dust cap › Press the release pin3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow and
6 Ball head at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the di-
7 Operating lever rection of the arrow.
8 Lock cap The operating lever remains locked in this position.
9 Release pin
10 Key CAUTION
11 locking ball In the ready position, the key cannot be removed nor turned to a different po-
sition.
Note
If you lose the key, please get in touch with a specialist garage.

Hitch and trailer 167

Fitting the ball head CAUTION
■ After removing the key, always replace the cover on the lock – there is a risk
of the lock getting dirty.
■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times. Such
dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.

Check proper fitting

Fig. 158
Correctly secured ball head

Fig. 157 Insert the ball head/lock the lock, and put the lock cover on

 Read and observe and on page 166 first.

› Pull cap 4 » Fig. 155 on page 167 downwards.

› Adjust the ball head to the ready position » page 167.
› Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 157 and insert into the mounting re-  Read and observe and on page 166 first.
cess until you hear it click into place » .
Check that the ball head is fitted properly each time before use.
The operating lever 1 automatically turns upwards and the release pin 2
pops out (its red and green parts are visible) » . Correctly secured ball head » Fig. 158
If the operating lever 1 does not automatically emerge, or if the release pin  Lever 1 is up as far as it will go » Fig. 158.
2 does not pop out, remove the ball head from the mounting recess by turn-  The release pin 2 is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are
ing the lever downwards as far as it will go. Clean the tapered surfaces on the visible).
ball head and the mounting recess.  The key is removed.
› Turn the key 3 180° to the right so that its green marker points upward.  Cap 3 is on the lock.
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow.  The ball head does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy
› Insert and press the cap 4 onto the lock in the direction of the arrow » . “shaking”.
› Check the ball head for secure mounting » page 168.
WARNING
WARNING The towing device can only be used when the tow bar is correctly locked –
■ Keep your hands outside the lever's range of motion when attaching the there is the risk of an accident occurring.
ball head – there is a risk of fingers being injured!
■ Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the
key. Doing so would mean the ball head is not attached correctly.

168 Driving
Removing the ball head CAUTION
■ If the lever is held firmly and not pushed downwards as far as it can go, it will
go back up after the ball head is removed and will not latch into the ready po-
sition. The ball head then needs to be brought into this position before the
next time it is fitted.
■ Tuck the ball bar in the ready position, with the golden key up, in the box -
otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key!
■ Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not
step on it).

Note
■ We recommend that you put the protective cap on the ball before removing
Fig. 159 Unlock the operating lever of the ball head/removing the ball the ball head.
head ■ Clean any dirt from the ball head before stowing it away in the box with the
vehicle tool kit.
 Read and observe and on page 166 first.
Accessories
› Remove cover 1 » Fig. 159from the lock in the direction of the arrow.
› Insert the key into the lock, so that its green marking is pointing upwards. Fig. 160
› Turn the key 2 180° to the left so that its red marker points upward. Representation of the maximum
› Grasp the ball head from underneath. permissible level of the ball head
› Press the release pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow and of the towing hitch and the per-
at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the di-
missible total weight of the ac-
rection of the arrow.
cessories including the load de-
The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it pending on the load center of
does not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards. gravity
At the same time, the ball head latches into the ready position and is thus
ready to be re-inserted into the mounting recess » .  Read and observe and on page 166 first.
› Place the cap 4 » Fig. 155 on page 167 onto the mounting recess. An accessory can mounted on the ball head of the towing hitch (e.g. bike carri-
WARNING ers).
Never allow the ball head to remain unsecured in the boot. This could If this accessory is used, the maximum permissible overhang of the ball head
cause damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the towing hitch and the permissible gross vehicle weight of the accesso-
of the occupants at risk. ries including load are to be checked.
The maximum permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing hitch is 70
cm » Fig. 160.
The total permitted weight of the accessory including load changes with in-
creasing distance of the centre of gravity of the load from the ball head of the
towing hitch. 

Hitch and trailer 169

 Distance of the centre of gravity of Permissible total weight of the ac- Attaching and detaching trailers
the load from the ball head cessory, including load
0 cm 80 kg Fig. 161
30 cm 75 kg Swivel out the 13-pin power
60 cm 35 kg socket, safety eyelet
70 cm 0 kg

WARNING
■ Never exceed the permissible gross weight of the accessory including
load - there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch.
■ Never exceed the permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing
hitch - there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch. Coupling
› Install the tow bar.
Note › Grip the 13-pin socket at point A and swing out in the direction of ar-
row » Fig. 161.
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
› Lift off protective cap 5 » Fig. 155 on page 167 towards the top.
› Place the trailer onto the ball.
Trailer › Insert the trailer cable into the 13-pin socket.
If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable
 Introduction
adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories to establish a connection to the elec-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: tricity.
Attaching and detaching trailers 170 › Hook the breakaway cable of the trailer to the security lock slot B.
Loading a trailer 171 The breakaway cable of the trailer has to sag when mounted into the security
Towing a trailer 171 lock slot for all trailer positions relative to the vehicle (sharp curves, reverse
Trailer stabilisation (TSA) 172 driving and the like).
Anti-theft alarm system 172
Uncoupling
If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with towing equipment or is fit- The uncoupling of the trailer is carried out in reverse order.
ted with towing equipment from ŠKODA Original Accessories, then it meets all
of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer.
› Unhook the breakaway cable of the trailer from the security lock slot
B » Fig. 161.
Note › Pull the trailer cable out of the 13-pin socket.
If there is an error in the trailer lighting system, check the fuses in the fuse box
› Remove the trailer from the ball head.
in the dashboard » page 220.
› Place the cover 5 on the ball head » Fig. 155 on page 167.
› Grip the 13-pin socket at point A and swing in the opposite direction to the
arrow » Fig. 161. 

170 Driving
Exterior mirrors Tyre pressure
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a “full load” » page 198.
the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. National legal
Trailer load
requirements must be observed.
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan-
Headlights ces » page 228, Technical data.
The front of the vehicle can be lifted when a trailer is being towed and the
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
headlights can dazzle other road users.
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
Adjust the headlight setting on the headlight range control » page 68, Operat-
The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1,000 metres above
ing the lights and the instrument illumination.
mean sea level.
WARNING The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the ability to climb.
■ Incorrect or improperly connected electrical installation can cause acci- Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (or part), the maximum per-
dents and serious injury due to electric shock. missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 %.
■ Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist ga-
The towed weight comprises the actual weights of the (loaded) towing vehicle
rages. and the (loaded) trailer.
■ Never directly connect the trailer's electrical system with the electrical
connections for the tail lights or other current sources. The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing
■ After coupling the trailer and connecting up the power socket, check the equipment are merely test data for the towing equipment. The vehicle-specific
rear lights on the trailer to ensure they are working. values are detailed in the vehicle documents.
■ The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and
WARNING
uncoupling the trailer.
■ Never use the safety eyelet for towing! ■ The maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the permissible
weight of the trailer must not exceed - this could cause an accident!
■ A sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safe-
CAUTION
ty - there is a risk of accident!
Incorrect or improperly connected electrical installations may cause malfunc-
tion of the entire vehicle electronics.
Towing a trailer
Loading a trailer
Driving speed
The vehicle/trailer combination must be balanced, whereby the maximum per- For safety reasons, do not drive faster than 80 km/h when towing a trailer.
missible drawbar load must be utilised. If the drawbar load is too low, it jeop- Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
ardises the performance of the vehicle/trailer combination. trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by acceler-
Distribution of the load ating.
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as Brakes
close to the axle as possible. Secure the items from slipping. Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the the brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts re-
trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving sulting from the trailer wheels locking.
with this combination. On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake. 

Hitch and trailer 171

Engine overheating WARNING
The speed must be reduced immediately if the needle for the coolant tempera- ■ The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt
ture gauge moves into the right-hand area or the red area of the scale. you to take greater risks than otherwise.
Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light  in the instrument cluster ■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking manoeuvres - there is a risk
illuminates. of accidents.
The following guidelines must be observed » page 36,  Coolant.
CAUTION
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating. ■ The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving sit-
uations.
WARNING
■ Light trailers that sway are not always detected and therefore stabilised ac-
■ Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer. cordingly by the trailer stabilisation.
■ Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
■ Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regula-
situation. ted.

CAUTION Note
If you tow a trailer frequently, you should also have your vehicle inspected be- The trailer stabilisation works for both braked and unbraked trailers.
tween service intervals.
Anti-theft alarm system
Trailer stabilisation (TSA)
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is activated when the electrical connec-
The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works tion to the trailer is interrupted.
in conjunction with the counter-steering assistance to reduce the amount the Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or un-
trailer "sways". coupled » page 55.
After turning on the ignition, the ESC warning light  in the instrument cluster Conditions for including a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system.
illuminates for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS warning light.
 The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and towing
Function requirements for trailer stabilisation. equipment.
 The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA  The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
genuine accessories. trailer socket.
 The ESC is active. (Warning lights  or  do not illuminate in the instru-  The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional.
ment cluster).  The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm system
 The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the is activated.
trailer socket.
 The speed is higher than approx. 60 km/h. CAUTION
 The trailer has a rigid drawbar. For technical reasons, trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the
anti-theft alarm system.

172 Driving
 For the sake of the environment
General Maintenance
Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be
kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later
Car care date. This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound
manner.
Services, modifications and technical alterations
Note
 Introduction ■ We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions 173
the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty » Service schedule.
Statutory checks 173 ■ The ŠKODA Partner does not assume any liability for products that have not
ŠKODA Service Partners 174 been approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. even though these may be products with
ŠKODA Original parts 174 an operational approval or that have been approved by a government testing
ŠKODA Original accessories 174 institute.
Spoiler 175 ■ We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original
Airbags 175 Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability,
safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when ■ ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be purchased from
carrying out all modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle. ŠKODA Partners, who will also perform the professional assembly of the pur-
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and chased parts.
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. After carrying out modifi-
cations, repairs or technical alterations, the vehicle will comply with German Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
road transport regulations (StVO)
 Read and observe on page 173 first.
Always consult a ŠKODA Partner » page 174before buying accessories or
parts, or before carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its
to your vehicle. intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA Partner.

WARNING He will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full
functioning of the vehicle as well as to prevent damage.
■ Works on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofessionally, can
cause operational faults – risk of accident! This involves, for example, the coolant, battery replacement and the like.
■ Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to
operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected Statutory checks
systems because of the networking of the electronic components. The op-
erational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to in-  Read and observe on page 173 first.
creased wear of parts.
Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability and road
worthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at specific
intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that
have been legally authorised for this purpose. 

Car care 173

The ŠKODA Service Partners are up-to-date on the legally required tests and ŠKODA AUTO a.s. can guarantee the safety, suitability, and long life of these
will prepare the vehicle for the tests as part of a service operation if required, products. We therefore recommend that you only use ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
or will be responsible for carrying out these tests. The specialist garages can
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. supplies the market with a complete range of ŠKODA Genu-
carry out the specified tests directly, if required by the customer, if they are
ine Parts not only while the model is still in production but with wear-and-tear
authorised to do so. This saves you time and money.
parts for at least 15 years after the end of series production and with all other
Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for vehicle parts for at least 10 years.
prior checking in preparation of a legally required test, we recommend that you
ŠKODA service partners are liable for any defects in ŠKODA original parts for a
consult the service consultant of your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand.
period of 2 years after sale in accordance with materials defect liability under
Based on their appraisal, the service consultant will tell you which areas you the law unless otherwise agreed in the purchase agreement. You should keep
should focus on in order to ensure that your vehicle will pass the technical test the confirmed warranty certificate and the receipt for these components for
without any problems. This allows you to avoid additional expenses resulting this period, so that the commencement of the warranty term may be verified.
from a possible subsequent test.
Body repairs
ŠKODA vehicles are designed so that if the body suffers damage, it is only nec-
ŠKODA Service Partners essary to replace those parts which are in fact damaged.
 Read and observe on page 173 first. Before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced, however, you should
first contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not such parts can
ŠKODA Service Partners are equipped with modern, specially developed tools also be repaired. Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper.
and equipment. Here, trained specialists have access to a comprehensive
range of ŠKODA Original Parts and ŠKODA Original Accessories for carrying out
modifications, repairs and technical alterations.
ŠKODA Original accessories
All ŠKODA service partners operate according to the latest guidelines and in-  Read and observe on page 173 first.
structions from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore car-
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
ried out on time and to the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions
ing:
and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good
technical condition. We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. offers a warranty on the reliability, safety and suitability for
ŠKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle
your particular vehicle of these accessories. Although we constantly monitor
and to provide quality work. We therefore advise you to have all modifications,
the market, we are not able to assess or offer a warranty on other products
repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service
even though in some instances such products may have a type approval or
Partner.
may have been approved by a nationally recognised approval authority.
ŠKODA Original parts All accessory products go through a fastidious process of technical develop-
ment (technical tests) and quality inspection (customer tests), and only if all
 Read and observe on page 173 first. tests are positive does the product become a ŠKODA Genuine Accessory.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, since these Our ŠKODA Genuine Accessories service also provides expert advice and pro-
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. They correspond exactly to ŠKODA fessional fitting if requested by the customer.
AUTO a.s. specifications in respect of design, dimensional accuracy and materi- ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects in ŠKODA Genuine Parts for a
al and are identical to the components used in the batch production. period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with materials de-
fect liability legislation, unless otherwise agreed in the purchase contract or in 

174 General Maintenance

any other agreements. You should keep the confirmed warranty certificate and Airbags
the receipt for these accessories for this period, so that the commencement of
the warranty term may be verified.  Read and observe on page 173 first.
In addition, ŠKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front
products as well as those parts which are subject to natural wear and tear, bumper, doors, front seats, roof lining or body.
such as tyres, batteries, bulbs and wiper blades.
WARNING
Note
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
The accessories authorized by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. will be offered by the ŠKODA system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
Partners in all countries where ŠKODA AUTO a.s. has a sales and service net- wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
work. This will usually be in the form of a printed catalogue of Original ŠKODA ■ Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
Accessories, in the form of separate printed brochures or in the form of offers unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
for ŠKODA Genuine Accessories on the ŠKODA Partner's website. riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
Spoiler ■ The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.
Airbag modules cannot be repaired.
 Read and observe on page 173 first.

If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination WARNING
with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid, then the following instruc- Information on the use of the airbag system
tions must be adhered to. ■ It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this
› For safety reasons, the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front might result in the airbag being deployed.
bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart- ■ Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed
ment lid. from old cars or have been recycled.
› This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own, in ■ Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle. The airbags may then
combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident.
combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid. ■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
› We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA service partner for any repairs to
or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers. WARNING
WARNING ■ A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
■ If work on your vehicle's spoilers is not carried out properly, this can lead proved wheels and tyre combinations, can alter the functioning of the air-
to operational faults - risk of accident and serious injuries. bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork. 
■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
The front brakes may overheat, which can have a negative impact on the
functioning of the braking system – there is a risk of an accident!

Car care 175

 WARNING It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front of the winter.
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
WARNING
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system. Any work ■ When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist ga- system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
■ Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off – risk of accident!
rage. The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Never drive with inner door panels removed.
■ Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the CAUTION
resulting openings have not been properly sealed. Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight – risk of paint damage.
■ Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, unless
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed. For the sake of the environment
■ Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose.
loudspeakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner
door panels. Washing by hand
 Read and observe and on page 176 first.
Washing vehicle
Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible.
 Introduction Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove or a washing brush.
Work from the top to the bottom - starting with the roof.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Washing by hand 176
Automatic car wash systems 177 Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner 177 Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences areas.
is frequent washing. Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
How often the vehicle should be washed depends on factors such as: leather.
› Frequency of use. CAUTION
› Parking situation (garage, under trees etc.). When washing the car by hand, protect your hands and arms from sharp-
› Season. ■
edged metal parts (e.g. when cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel
› Weather conditions. housings or the wheel trims, etc.) - There is a risk of cuts!
› Environmental influences. ■ Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle's paintwork.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust,
tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to
the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect
can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, ac-
centuate this caustic effect.

176 General Maintenance

Automatic car wash systems ■ The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 °C – risk
of damaging the vehicle.
 Read and observe and on page 176 first. ■ See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high-pressure clean-
er » page 179 .
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
in an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilt-
ing roof etc.).
Taking care of your vehicle exterior
If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler,  Introduction
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of
the car wash system beforehand. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the lips of the wipers should be Taking care of your vehicle's paintwork 178
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de- Plastic parts 178
greased. Rubber seals 178
Chrome parts 178
WARNING Decorative films 179
Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle Windows and exterior mirrors 179
in an automatic car wash system. Never manually fold in electric exterior Headlight lenses 179
mirrors - always use the electric controls.
Door lock cylinders 179
Cavity protection 180
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner Jack 180
 Read and observe and on page 176 first. Wheels 180
Towing device and mounting recess 180
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for Underbody protection 180
use of the equipment must be observed. This applies in particular to the pres-
sure used and to the spraying distance. We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft mate- age must be observed.
rials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
WARNING
WARNING ■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters! to the instructions.
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com-
CAUTION pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
■ If washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high-pressure cleaner, ■ Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when clean-
ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the ing the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims –
door/panel joints – risk of freezing! risk of cuts! 
■ To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high-pressure
cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short pe-
riods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed.

Car care 177

 CAUTION CAUTION
■ Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning ■ Never apply wax to the windows.
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface. ■ Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or
■ Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned. hard waxes.
■ Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
For the sake of the environment ■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful ■ If possible, do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork
to the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national that come into contact with door seals or window guides.
legislation.
Plastic parts
Note
Because of the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any poten-  Read and observe and on page 177 first.
tial problems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle exterior, we recom-
mend that cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a ŠKODA Service Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth.
Partner. If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts, use cleaning prod-
ucts specially designed for this purpose.
Taking care of your vehicle's paintwork
CAUTION
 Read and observe and on page 177 first. Do not use paint care products on plastic parts.
Minor paint damage such as scratches, scuffs or stone chips should be treated
immediately if possible, using touch-up pens or sprays. Rubber seals
Preserving the vehicle paintwork  Read and observe and on page 177 first.
A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle's paintwork with highly effec-
All door seals and window guides are factory-treated with a colourless matt
tive protection against harmful environmental influences.
varnish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, against driving noise.
when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body-
work after it has dried thoroughly. CAUTION
Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating,
the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax. and driving noise may occur.

Polishing Chrome parts

Polishing is necessary if the vehicle's paintwork has become unattractive and
if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives.  Read and observe and on page 177 first.
If the polish does not contain any preserving elements, the paint must be trea- First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a
ted with a preservative afterwards. soft, dry cloth.
If this method does not completely clean chrome parts, use a specific chrome
care product. 

178 General Maintenance

 CAUTION CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment - risk of surface ■ The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc-
scratches. tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.
■ Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel, sand or
Decorative films salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors – there is a risk of
damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors.
 Read and observe and on page 177 first. ■ Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water – risk of
cracks forming in the glass.
Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean, warm water. Never use ■ When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the
harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents, as this could damage the films. paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage.
The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a ■ Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp-edged objects or corro-
high-pressure cleaner: sive and acidic cleaning agents – there is a risk of damaging the heating ele-
› The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be ments or window aerial.
50 cm.
› Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface. Headlight lenses
› The maximum water temperature is 50 °C.
› The maximum water pressure is 80 bar.  Read and observe and on page 177 first.

CAUTION Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean, warm water and soap.
In the winter months, do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from CAUTION
the areas with films. Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of
■ Never wipe headlights to dry.
snow or ice – risk of film damage.
■ Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses, as this may damage
the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the head-
Windows and exterior mirrors light lenses.
■ Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the
 Read and observe and on page 177 first.
headlights, as this could damage the headlight lenses.
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir-
rors. Door lock cylinders
Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water.  Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this
purpose. Specific products must be used for de-icing door lock cylinders.

When drying the windows after washing the vehicle, do not use window leath- CAUTION
ers that have been used to polish the bodywork. Residues of preservatives in When washing your vehicle, ensure as little water as possible gets into the
the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility. locking cylinders.

Car care 179

Cavity protection CAUTION
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This
 Read and observe and on page 177 first. may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the
steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re-applied. Towing device and mounting recess
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these  Read and observe and on page 177 first.
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
um cleaner. Close the mounting recess with the cap to prevent any ingress of dirt.
WARNING If dirt is present, clean the inner surfaces of the mounting recess and treat
Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re- with a suitable preservative.
move wax – risk of fire! Always check the ball head before hitching a trailer. Apply a suitable grease, if
necessary.
Jack Fit the protective cap when stowing away the ball head to protect the luggage
compartment against dirt.
 Read and observe and on page 177 first.
CAUTION
The jack is maintenance-free. Apply grease to the inner part of the mounting recess. Make sure you do not
If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should be lubricated with a suitable remove any grease.
lubricant.
Underbody protection
Wheels
 Read and observe and on page 177 first.
 Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and me-
Wheel rims chanical influences.
Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular When driving, it cannot be guaranteed that no damage to the protective layer
basis. will occur.
Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion, otherwise the rim material will be We recommend having the protective layer underneath the vehicle and the
corroded. chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately. winter.
Light alloy wheels WARNING
After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for ex-
for light alloy wheels. Products which cause abrasion must not be used to haust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filters or heat shields.
treat the wheel rims. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances may
ignite - risk of fire!

180 General Maintenance

Taking care of the interior For the sake of the environment
Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful
 Introduction to the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national
legislation.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Natural leather 181 Note
Synthetic leather, fabrics and Alcantara® 182 Because of the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any poten-
tial problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle, we rec-
Seat covers 182
ommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by
Seat belts 183
a ŠKODA Service Partner.
Regular and proper care helps to ensure efficiency and maintain the value of
your vehicle. Natural leather
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.  Read and observe and on page 181 first.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
age must be observed. Leather is a natural material with specific properties, and requires regular
cleaning and maintenance.
WARNING
The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of
■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
wear-and-tear.
to the instructions.
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com- Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials. This leads to se-
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning! vere corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface.
We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a
CAUTION cloth or vacuum cleaner.
■ Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible
Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water-dampened cotton or woollen cloth
stains on the material (leather), panels and textiles.
and then dry with a clean, dry cloth » .
■ Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
polish, etc., from the material (leather), panels and textiles as quickly as possi- Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution (2 ta-
ble. blespoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water).
■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature
To remove stains, use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose.
inside the vehicle is high.
■ Do not attach scent dispensers or air fresheners to the dash panel – risk of Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather
damage to the dash panel. care product.
■ Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows, the rear side win-
CAUTION
dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the
window aerial. These may get damaged. ■ Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that
■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface no water gets into the seams. Otherwise, the leather could become brittle or
of the panelling. cracked.
■ Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned. ■ Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the
■ Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product. leather from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods,
protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it. 

Car care 181

■ Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp- If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods, protect the Al-
edged belts, jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs cantara® seat upholstery from direct sunlight to prevent fading.
of rubbing on the surface. Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as
Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal.
a justified complaint.
■ The use of an additional mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the CAUTION
leather surface of the steering wheel. ■ Do not use leather cleaners on Alcantara® seat upholstery.
■ Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular ba-
■ Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar agents
sis and each time after cleaning. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to on Alcantara® seat upholstery.
breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface ■ Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order
protection. to stop the fabric from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked outside for long peri-
■ Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
ods of time, cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight.
ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers, ■ Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov- ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
fastness of the clothing textiles. ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
Note fastness of the clothing textiles.
When using the vehicle, minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts
of the covers (e.g. wrinkles or creases) as a result of the stress applied to the Seat covers
covers.  Read and observe and on page 181 first.

Synthetic leather, fabrics and Alcantara® Electrically heated seats

Do not clean the covers by moistening, as this can damage the seat heating
 Read and observe and on page 181 first. system.
Artificial leather Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers.
Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth.
Seats without seat heating
If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather, use a mild soap Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning.
solution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose.
Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially de-
Fabric signed for this purpose.
Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors, boot cover, etc. us- Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use, can be removed by
ing specific cleaning agents, e.g., dry foam. brushing against the direction of hair with a damp brush.
Use a soft sponge, brush, or commercially available microfibre cloth. Always clean all parts of the covers, so that there are no visible edges. Then
Use a cloth and special detergent to clean the headlining. allow the seat to dry completely.
Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush. CAUTION
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning glove”. ■Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner.
■Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the
Alcantara® heater. 
Dust and fine dirt particles in pores, creases and seams may chafe and damage
the surface.

182 General Maintenance

■ Do not sit on wet seats - risk of seat deformation.
■ Always clean the seats “from seam to seam”.
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Seat belts
 Read and observe and on page 181 first.  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The belt webbing must always be kept clean.
Refuelling 184
Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water.
Unleaded petrol 184
Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush. Diesel fuel 185
Dirty belt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel.
The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the
WARNING inside of the fuel filler flap » Fig. 162 on page 184 - .
■ The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning. WARNING
■ Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canis-
destroy the fabric.
ter in the vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your
■ The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive
vehicle for safety reasons. in the event of an accident, these canisters can
liquids (e.g. acids).
become damaged and fuel may escape – risk of fire!
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage
to the belt webbing, seat belt connections, inertia reel or lock is detected,
the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage. CAUTION
■ The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up. ■ Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and
the exhaust system.
■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage!
■ If the vehicle was not purchased in the country in which it was intended to
be operated, you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer
is offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated. You should also
perhaps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel
for operation of the vehicle in the country concerned. If no prescribed fuel is
available, then you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to
operate the vehicle with another fuel type.

Inspecting and replenishing 183

 Refuelling Note
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres, including a reserve of approx.
10.5 litres.

Unleaded petrol
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.

The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol that meets the EN 2281)
standard.
All petrol engines can be operated using petrol with a maximum of 10% bioe-
thanol (E10).
Fig. 162 Open fuel filler flap / tank cap Specified fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON
Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON. Unleaded petrol with the
 Read and observe and on page 183 first.
octane ratings 91 or 92 or 93 RON can also be used, but may result in a slight
Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliary heating system (auxiliary heating and loss in performance and slightly increased fuel consumption .
ventilation) » page 119. Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON
› Unlock the vehicle. Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON or higher.
› Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 162 - . If unleaded gasoline is not available with the octane number 95 RON, in an
› Unscrew the filler cap by turning it in a counter clockwise direction and place emergency petrol with the octane rating of 91 or 92 or 93 RON can be used to
the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap» Fig. 162 - . fill the tank, but this leads to a slight loss of performance and a slightly in-
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go. creased fuel consumption » .
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
Prescribed fuel - unleaded fuel 98/95 RON
time » .
Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON or higher. Unleaded petrol
› Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance.
pump.
In an emergency, if unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 98 RON or 95 RON
› Insert the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and screw it in a clockwise direc- is not available, you may refuel with petrol with an octane rating of 91 or 92 or
tion until it clicks into place.
93 RON » .
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Fuel additives
Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly.
Unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 1 ) meets all the conditions for a smooth
CAUTION running engine. We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used. This
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust sys-
time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. tem. 

1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 91 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 98.

184 General Maintenance

 CAUTION Diesel fuel
■ Even one filling of the tank with petrol that does not meet the standards can
lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system!  Read and observe and on page 183 first.
■ If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 5901)
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is used by mistake, do not start the engine or
standard.
switch on the ignition! Engine parts could be significantly damaged!
All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% bi-
CAUTION odiesel (B7)2).
■ If, in an emergency, the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower oc-
On the Indian market, your vehicle will only be able to run on diesel fuel com-
tane number than the one prescribed, the journey must only be continued at
pliant with standard IS 1460/Bharat IV. If diesel fuel which complies with this
medium engine speeds and a low engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a
standard is not available, you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard
high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the
IS 1460/Bharat III in case of emergency.
prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
■ Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the Operation in winter - Winter-grade diesel fuel
one prescribed is used. In the cold season, only use “winter-grade diesel fuel” which will still operate
■ Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91 properly even at a temperature of -20 °C.
RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel
CAUTION fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. ŠKODA Partners
In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used, especially not and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with in-
with manganese and iron content. There is a risk of causing considerable formation regarding the diesel fuels available.
damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system! Preheating fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system. This secures opera-
CAUTION
tion of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of
Fuels with metal components, such as LRP (lead replacement petrol) must -25 °C.
not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the
engine or exhaust system! Diesel fuel additives
The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the con-
Note ditions for a smooth running engine. We therefore recommend that no diesel
■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the fuel additives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine can be used without limitations. engine or the exhaust system. 
■ The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not re-
sult in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in ve-
hicles for which unleaded petrol 95/91, 92 or 93 RON is specified.
■ On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of pet-
rol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and re-
duce fuel consumption.

1) In Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590:2004.
2) In Germany complying with standard DIN 52638, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.

Inspecting and replenishing 185

 CAUTION WARNING (Continued)
■ Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the ■ If the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever in-
standard, can cause severe damage to parts of the engine, the fuel and ex- to Neutral, or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, move the
haust system! selector lever into position P.
■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men- ■ Allow the engine to cool.
tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the ■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the
ignition! Engine parts could be significantly damaged! engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until no more steam or coolant
■ Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults. is escaping.

CAUTION
WARNING
■ The vehicle cannot be operated with biofuel RME, therefore this fuel must
Information for working in the engine compartment
not be filled in the tank and used for driving the vehicle. The use of biofuel
■ Keep all people, especially children, away from the engine compartment.
RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system.
■ Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm. The fan might
■ Do not mix any fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
suddenly start running!
agents), into the diesel. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
engine or the exhaust system!
■ The coolant is harmful to health.
■ Avoid contact with the coolant.
Engine compartment ■ Coolant vapours are harmful to health.
■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
 Introduction engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
■ When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir, cover it
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
with a cloth to protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot
Opening and closing the bonnet 187 coolant.
Engine compartment overview 188 ■ If any coolant splashes into your eyes, immediately rinse out your eyes
Radiator fan 188 with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
Windscreen washer system 188 ■ Always keep the coolant in the original container, safe from people who
are not completely independent, especially children - there is a danger of
WARNING poisoning!
Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in ■ Consult a doctor immediately if coolant is swallowed.
the engine compartment. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the ■ Never spill fluids on the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the antifreeze con-
warning instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety tained in the coolant) may ignite!
rules. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area!
WARNING
WARNING Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment ning
■ Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key. ■ Pay particular attention to rotating engine parts (e.g. V-ribbed belt, gen-
■ Firmly apply the handbrake. erator, radiator fan) and the high voltage ignition system – risk to life!
■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system. 

186 General Maintenance

 WARNING (Continued) Opening and closing the bonnet
■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
■ Always make sure that no jewellery, loose clothing or long hair can get
caught in rotating engine parts – risk to life! Always remove any jewellery,
tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any
work.

WARNING
Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system
■ Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system.
■ Do not smoke.
■ Never work near open flames. Fig. 163 Bonnet release lever/release lever
■ Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby.
 Read and observe and on page 186 first.
WARNING Open flap
■ Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid › Pull the release lever under the dash panel in the direction of the arrow
containers. 1 » Fig. 163.
■ Keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe from peo-
Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers
ple who are not completely independent, e.g. children.
are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be
■ If you intend to work underneath the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle
damaged.
from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks; the car
jack is not sufficient – risk of injury! › Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 to unlock the bonnet.
› Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas
CAUTION spring.
Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. This may result in major Close the flap
operating problems and also vehicle damage! › Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised
gas spring.
For the sake of the environment › Close the bonnet from a height of approximately 20 cm with a slight swing
In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids
and the special tools and knowledge required for such work, we recommend WARNING
that fluids be changed by a specialist garage. ■Check that the bonnet is closed properly.
■If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving, stop the
Note vehicle immediately and close the bonnet – risk of accident!
■Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids.
■Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Origi- CAUTION
nal Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
Never open the bonnet by the locking lever » Fig. 163.

Inspecting and replenishing 187

 Engine compartment overview WARNING
After switching off the ignition, the fan may intermittently continue to op-
erate for approx. 10 minutes.

Windscreen washer system

Fig. 165
Engine compartment: Wind-
screen washer fluid reservoir

Fig. 164 Principle sketch: Engine compartment

 Read and observe and on page 186 first.
 Read and observe and on page 186 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compart-
Arrangement in the engine compartment » Fig. 164 ment » Fig. 165.
1 Coolant expansion reservoir 192 This contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the
2 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 188 headlight cleaning system.
3 Engine oil filler opening 191 The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5.5 litres on vehicles that
4 Engine oil dipstick 190 have a headlight cleaning system1).
5 Brake fluid reservoir 193
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head-
6 Battery (below a cover) 193 lights. We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from
Note the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories (with antifreeze in winter), which will
remove any stubborn dirt.
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical. The washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze in winter even if
the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles.
Radiator fan Under exceptional circumstances, methylated spirits can also be used if no
screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated
 Read and observe and on page 186 first.
spirits must not be more than 15 %. The freeze protection at this concentration
The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor. Operation is controlled ac- is sufficient only to -5 °C. 

cording to the temperature of the coolant.

1) In some countries, 5.5 ltr. applies for both variants.

188 General Maintenance

 CAUTION WARNING
■ Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added ■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
to the windscreen washer fluid. warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
■ If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, only cleaning prod- gine compartment » page 186.
ucts which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be ■  Stop driving if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine
added to the windscreen washer fluid. oil under the current conditions. Switch off the engine and seek assistance
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re- from a specialist garage.
filling, as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system, ■  Do not drive on if the oil level is above range A » Fig. 166 on
leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction. page 190. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist ga-
rage.
Engine oil
CAUTION
 Introduction Do not pour any additives into the engine oil – risk of serious damage to the
engine parts!
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Specifications and capacity 189 Note
Checking the oil level 190 ■ Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you en-
Replenishing 191 gine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle.
■ We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
The engine has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil that can be use ■ If oil comes into contact with your skin, the affected area must be washed
throughout the year - except in extreme climate zones. thoroughly.
The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development. Thus the in-
formation stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publica- Specifications and capacity
tion.
 Read and observe and on page 189 first.
ŠKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manu-
facturer. We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with flexible service intervals
ŠKODA Service Partner. Petrol engines Specification Capacity
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated sep- 1.4 l/92 kW TSI VW 503 00, VW 504 00 3.6
arately or together with other specifications on the bottle. 1.8 l/112, 118 kW TSI VW 504 00 4.6
The oil capacities include oil filter change. Check the oil level when filling; do 2.0 l/147 kW TSI VW 504 00 4.6
not over fill. The oil level must be between the markings » page 190.
3.6 l/191 kW FSI VW 504 00 5.5

Diesel enginesa) Specification Capacity

1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 4.3
2.0 ltr/103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
2.0 ltr/125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
a) Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF 

Inspecting and replenishing 189

Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with fixed service intervals  Read and observe and on page 189 first.
Petrol engines Specification Capacity The dipstick indicates the engine oil level » Fig. 166.
1.4 l/92 kW TSI VW 501 01, VW 502 00 3.6
Checking the oil level
VW 502 00 Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has
1.8 l/112, 118 kW TSI applies to Russia 4.6 reached its operating temperature.
SAE 0W-30
VW 502 00 / 505 00 › Switch off the engine.
VW 502 00 Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the sump.

2.0 l/147 kW TSI applies to Russia 4.6 › Open the bonnet.

SAE 0W-30 › Pull out the dipstick.
VW 502 00 / 505 00 › Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop.
3.6 l/191 kW FSI VW 502 00 5.5 › Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
Oil level within range A
Diesel engines a)
Specification Capacity
No oil must be refilled.
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 4.3
Oil level within range B
2.0 ltr/103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
Oil can be refilled. The oil level may lie in range A .
2.0 ltr/125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 4.3
Oil level within range C
a) Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF
The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches
CAUTION range B .
■ If the above engine oils are not available, a different engine oil can be used in The engine burns some oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5 l/1 000
an emergency. To prevent damage to the engine, a maximum of 0.5 litres only km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you op-
of the following engine oils may be used until the next oil change: erate your vehicle. Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the
■ For petrol engine models: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN/API SM; first 5 000 kilometres.
■ For diesel engine models: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
The oil level must be checked at regular intervals. We recommend it be
checked after each time you refuel or prior to making a long journey.
Checking the oil level
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A , but not above, if
the engine has been operating at high loads, for example, during a lengthy
Fig. 166
motorway trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a
Principle sketch: Dipstick
high mountain pass.
The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is
too low » page 37,  Engine oil level. Check the oil level using the dipstick as
soon as possible. Add oil accordingly.

CAUTION
The oil level must never be above the A range » Fig. 166 – there is a risk of
damaging the exhaust system!

190 General Maintenance

 Replenishing WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
 Read and observe and on page 189 first. warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 186.
› Check the oil level » page 190.
› Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening » Fig. 164 on page 188. CAUTION
› Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct speci-
fications » page 189. ■ Do not continue if for some reason it is not possible to fill with coolant un-
› Check the oil level » page 190. der the current circumstances! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from
› Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully. a specialist garage.
■ If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
ventilate - there is a risk of engine damage,  do not continue driving! Switch
Coolant off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under
 Introduction
40%.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ Over 60% of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protec-
tion and cooling effect.
Capacity 191 ■ A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specifications can
Checking the coolant level 192 significantly reduce the corrosion protection.
Replenishing 192 ■ Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can con-

The coolant consists of water with coolant additive. This mixture guarantees sequently result in major engine damage!
■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » Fig. 167 on page 192.
antifreeze protection, protects the cooling/heater system against corrosion
■ If a fault causes the engine to overheat, we recommend visiting a specialist
and prevents lime formation.
garage, as otherwise serious engine damage may occur.
Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory-filled ■ Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -25 ℃. In impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
these countries, the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40%. ■ Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory-filled
with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -35 °C. In Capacity
these countries, the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50%.
 Read and observe and on page 191 first.
If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons, the con-
centration of coolant additive can be increased up to a maximum of 60% (anti- Coolant capacity (in litres) 1)

freeze protection down to approx. -40 °C). Petrol engines Capacity

When refilling, only use the same antifreeze identified on the coolant expan- 1.4 l/92 kW TSI 7.7
sion vessel » Fig. 167 on page 192. 1.8 l/112 kW TSI
8.6 
1.8 l/118 kW TSI

1) The coolant capacity is approximately 1 Litre greater on vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater
(auxiliary heating and ventilation).

Inspecting and replenishing 191

Petrol engines Capacity If the engine is warm, the test result may be inaccurate. The level can also be
above the mark A » Fig. 167.
2.0 l/147 kW TSI 8.6
3.6 l/191 kW FSI 9.0 If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low, this is indicated by
the warning light  illuminating in the instrument cluster » page 36,  Cool-
Diesel engines Capacity ant. We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR 8.4 from time to time.
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR 8.4 Loss of coolant
2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR 8.4 A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. Do
not merely top up the coolant. Have the cooling system checked by a specialist
garage.
Checking the coolant level
Replenishing
Fig. 167
Engine compartment: Coolant  Read and observe and on page 191 first.
expansion reservoir
The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of cool-
ant » page 191, in section Introduction.
› Switch off the engine.
› Allow the engine to cool.
› Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and carefully un-
screw the cap.
 Read and observe and on page 191 first. › Replenish the coolant.
› Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The coolant expansion reservoir is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 167. CAUTION
■ Only top up with new coolant.
Explanation of graphic » Fig. 167 ■ Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available. In
A Mark for the maximum permissible coolant level this case, use only water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and cool-
B Mark for the lowest permissible coolant level ant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible.
The coolant level should be kept between the marks A and B .
Brake fluid
If the coolant level is above the mark A, no coolant may be topped up.
If the coolant level is below the mark B, the coolant must be topped up.  Introduction
Checking the level This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Switch off the engine. Checking the brake fluid level 193
› Open the bonnet. Changing 193 
› Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle. » Fig. 167.
Check the coolant level only when the engine is cold.

192 General Maintenance

 WARNING There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid
■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” mark-
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en- ing.
gine compartment » page 186. If the brake fluid level is too low, this is indicated by the warning light
■  Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has fallen below the MIN  » page 35,  Brake system illuminating in the instrument cluster.
marking » Fig. 168 on page 193 - there is a risk of an accident. Seek help
from a specialist garage. Changing
■ Do not use used brake fluid - the function of the brake system may be im-
paired – risk of accident!  Read and observe and on page 193 first.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the
CAUTION
environment.
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake
Note system.
■ The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service.
The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid.
■ We recommend using brake fluids from the ŠKODA Original Accessories
range. The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications:
› VW 50114;
Checking the brake fluid level › FMVSS 116 DOT4.

Fig. 168 Vehicle battery

Engine compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir  Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Open cover 195
Checking the battery electrolyte level 195
Charging 196
Replacing 196
 Read and observe and on page 193 first.
Disconnecting or reconnecting 196
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment » Fig. 168. Automatic load deactivation 197
› Switch off the engine. Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
› Open the bonnet. Symbol Meaning
› Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir » Fig. 168.
The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.  Always wear eye protection.

A slight drop in the fluid level results in operation due to normal wear-and-tear Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
and the automatic adjustment of the brake pads.  tection. 

Inspecting and replenishing 193

 Symbol Meaning WARNING (Continued)
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the ■ Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery – risk of explosion and
 vehicle battery. chemical burns!
■ Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
 is produced.
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
 Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
WARNING ■ When you charge a battery, hydrogen is released, and a highly explosive
There is risk of injuries, poisoning, chemical burns, explosions or fire when gas mixture is also produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling
working on the battery and on the electrical system. It is essential to com- over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is
ply with the generally applicable rules of safety as well as the warning in- on.
■ Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery (e.g. with a metal ob-
structions outlined below.
■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde- ject or cable) creates a short circuit - risk of melting the lead bars, and risk
pendent, especially children. of explosion, battery fire and acid splashes.
■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the ■ Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices.

battery vent openings. Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
■ Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the en-
face shield – risk of blindness!
■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling gine, the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative
the vehicle battery. terminal (-) on the battery.
■ The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
with the greatest of care. CAUTION
■ Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivi- Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage. We recommend having
tis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs. all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and, if it comes into contact with the
skin, causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal. Repeated contact CAUTION
with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, skin cracks). ■ The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off,
■ If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the affected otherwise the vehicle's electrical system (electronic components) can be dam-
eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor aged. When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system, first of all
immediately! disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery, and then the positive ter-
■ Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as minal (+).
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. If you swal- ■ When connecting the battery to the electrical system, first of all connect the
low battery acid, consult a doctor immediately! positive terminal (+) of the battery, and then the negative terminal (-). Under
no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly – risk of a
WARNING cable fire.
■ Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
■ It is prohibited to work with naked flames or lights.
of damage to the paintwork.
■ It is prohibited to smoke or carry out any activities that produce sparks.
■ Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle bat-
■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
tery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light. 

194 General Maintenance

■ If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will Battery in the boot
discharge. This is because certain electrical components consume electricity The battery is located in the left side compartment with the symbol
(e. g. control units) also in idle state. Prevent the battery from discharging by  » page 101.
disconnecting the battery's negative terminal (-) or continuously charging the
battery with a very low charging current. Checking the battery electrolyte level
■ If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips, the vehicle battery
will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge.
Fig. 170
For the sake of the environment Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
indicator
A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste.
These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations.

Note
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.

Open cover
 Read and observe and on page 194 first.

On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator, » Fig. 170 the
colouring of the display can indicate the acidic level.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.
› Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
› Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for
checking the energy level for the recurring engine start.
Fig. 169 Polyester cover of the vehicle battery / plastic cover of the vehi-
cle battery We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist
garage, especially in the following cases.
 Read and observe and on page 194 first. › High external temperatures.
› Longer day trips.
The battery is located in the engine compartment, with some equipment under › After each charge.
a polyester cover » Fig. 169or in the left side compartment of the luggage com-
partment » page 101. Winter time
The vehicle battery only has some of its starting power at low temperatures. A
Battery in the engine compartment discharged vehicle battery may freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C.
› Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 169 - or press We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and, if necessary,
the catch on the side of the battery cover in the direction » Fig. 169 - .
› fold the cover up and remove. recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter. 

The battery cover is installed in reverse order.

Inspecting and replenishing 195

 CAUTION CAUTION
For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte On vehicles with the START/STOP system, the pole terminal of the charger
level cannot be checked. must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery,
but only to the engine earth » page 212, Jump-starting in vehicles with the
Note START STOP system.
The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of
the inspection service. Note
We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a special-
Charging ist garage.

 Read and observe and on page 194 first. Replacing

A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.  Read and observe and on page 194 first.
› Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components. The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and
› Disconnect both battery cables (“negative” first, then “positive”) only when size as the original battery. Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased
“rapid charging” the battery.
from a specialist garage.
› Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red =
“positive”, black = “negative”). We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage, where the
› Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be
charger on. disposed of in accordance with national regulations.
› Once charging is complete: Switch off the charger and remove the mains ca-
ble from the power socket. Disconnecting or reconnecting
› Only then disconnect the charger's terminal clamps.
› Reconnect the cables to the battery (first “positive”, then “negative”).  Read and observe and on page 194 first.

It is not necessary to disconnect the battery cables if you are recharging the The following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to oper-
vehicle battery using low amperages (for example from a mini-charger). Refer ate faultlessly after the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnec-
to the charger manufacturer's instructions. ted.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low- Function Operating measure
er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
Electrical power window (operational faults) » page 64
Both cables must be disconnected before charging the battery with high Panoramic sliding roof (operational faults) » page 218
amperages, known as “rapid charging”.
» User manual of the radio
The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging. Enter the radio/navigation system code
or » user manual of the naviga-
number
tion system
WARNING
Setting the clock » page 32
“Quick-charging” the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special
charger and specialist knowledge. Data in the multifunction display are de-
» page 44 
leted.

196 General Maintenance

 Note
Wheels
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage in order to
ensure full functionality of all electrical systems. Tyres and wheel rims
Automatic load deactivation  Introduction
 Read and observe and on page 194 first. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from dis- Service life of tyres 198
charging when the battery is put under high levels of strain. This may be no- Unidirectional tyres 199
ticed from the following. Spare and temporary spare wheel 200
› The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to Full wheel trim 200
the electrical system. Wheel bolts 201
› Where necessary, large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and
rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by ŠKODA for your mod-
the event of an emergency. el of vehicle.

CAUTION WARNING
■ Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres.
vehicle battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on
a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned WARNING
on during longer parking. Instructions for the use of tyres
■ Consumers that are supplied via a 12-V power socket can cause the vehicle ■ For the first 500 km, new tyres do not yet provide optimum grip, and ap-
battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off. propriate care should therefore be taken when driving – risk of accident!
■ For reasons of driving safety, do not replace tyres individually.
Note ■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity of moun-
Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated. The driver is ted tyres.
often not aware of it having taken place. ■ Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for the mounted tyres.
■ An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling.
■ Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged, immediately re-
duce your speed and stop! If no external damage is evident, drive slowly
and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked.

WARNING
Information regarding tyre damage or wear
■ Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age.
■ Never drive with damaged tyres – there is the risk of an accident occur-
ring. 

Wheels 197
 WARNING (Continued) Service life of tyres
■ You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down.
■ Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface, particularly at
high speeds on wet roads. This could lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled
vehicle movement – “swimming” on a wet road surface).

WARNING
■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility.
■ Too low or too high inflation pressure impairs handling.
■ If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre will have to overcome a higher
rolling resistance. This will cause a significant increase in the temperature Fig. 171 Principle sketch: Tyre tread with wear indicators/open fuel filler
of the tyre, especially at higher speeds. This can result in tread separation flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre inflation pressures
and a tyre blowout.
■ In the event of very fast tyre inflation pressure loss, such as a sudden tyre
failure, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop Fig. 172
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking. Replacing wheels

CAUTION
■ If a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres, the following
must be observed » page 200, Spare and temporary spare wheel.
■ The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil,
grease and fuel, which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with
these substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a special-
ist workshop.  Read and observe and on page 197 first.
■ If, in the case of puncture occurring, the spare tyre with a non-bound direc-
tion or an opposite direction of rotation must be mounted, then drive carefully. The service life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure, driving style and
The best properties of the tyre are no longer present in this situation. other circumstances.
Tyre pressure
For the sake of the environment
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a
■ Old and unserviceable tyres are classified in a special environmentally haz-
month and also before setting off on a long journey.
ardous category. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legis-
lation. The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler
■ Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption. flap » Fig. 171 – .
The tyre pressure for the spare wheel should correspond to the highest pres-
Note
sure specified for your vehicle.
■ We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe-
cialist garage. Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
■ We recommend that you use wheel rims, tyres, full wheel trims and snow higher pressure on warm tyres. 
chains from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

198 General Maintenance

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor- Wear indicators
ed » page 166. The base of the tread of the tyres contains has a 1.6 mm high wear indica-
tor » Fig. 171 - . In some countries, different tyre wear rates may apply.
With greater additional load, adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly.
Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular sym-
Driving style
bols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres.
Tyre age
Wheel balance
Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. When driving, however, there are a
used. The service life of the tyres is 6 years. Therefore, we recommend not us-
range of factors that may result in an imbalance. This may become apparent by
ing tyres that are older than 6 years.
“vibration” in the steering. If this is the case, have the wheels checked by a
specialist garage. Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
Have the wheels likewise rebalanced after replacing the tyres.
ommend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Acces-
Setting the vehicle geometry sories.
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the
tyres and impairs driving safety. With a distinctive tyre wear, we recommend Note
that you check the setting of the vehicle geometry in a specialist workshop. In some countries, the vehicles have a sticker with tyre inflation pressure val-
ues without pictograms.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
Unidirectional tyres
cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis. Remove foreign bodies (e.g.
small stones) from the tyre tread immediately.  Read and observe and on page 197 first.
Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
tyre.
Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres.
The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the
Exchanging the wheels optimal characteristics of these tyres.
For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels ev- These characteristics mainly relate to the following:
ery 10 000 km according to schedule » Fig. 172. You will then obtain approxi-
mately the same life for all the tyres.
› Increased driving stability.
› Reduced risk of aquaplaning.
After a wheel has been replaced, the tyre pressure has to be adjusted. › Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor-
ed » page 166.
Tyre storage
Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be
maintained if the tyres are reassembled.
Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry place that is as dark as possible.
Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.

Wheels 199
Spare and temporary spare wheel Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
› The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
Fig. 173
› Be particularly observant when driving.
Fixing the spare or temporary
› The temporary spare wheel is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for
the vehicle » Fig. 171 on page 198.
spare wheel › The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa.
› Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage,
since it is not intended for permanent use.

WARNING
■ Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted!
■ Only use the temporary spare wheel when absolutely necessary.
 Read and observe and on page 197 first. ■ Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged.
■ If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fitted tyres, never drive faster than 80 km/h (or 50 mph).
fixed in place with a special bolt » Fig. 173. ■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
■ The snow chains cannot be used on the temporary spare wheel.
Taking the wheel out
■ Observe the instructions on the warning sticker on the temporary spare
› Open the boot lid. wheel.
› Raise the floor covering in the boot » page 100.
› Remove the box with the tool kit.
› Unscrew the nut » Fig. 173 anti-clockwise. Full wheel trim
› Take out the wheel.
 Read and observe and on page 197 first.
Stowing the wheel
› Place the wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing down- Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel cover.
ward.
Pulling off
› Screw on the nut » Fig. 173 clockwise until the wheel is safely secured. › Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit » page 205 into the reinforced
› Replace the box with the tool kit into the spare wheel and secure it with the edge of the wheel trim.
tape.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment. › Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
› Close the boot lid.
Fit a wheel in the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible. Fitting
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to › Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used briefly correctly in place. 
in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is
adopted » .
Temporary spare wheel
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel.

200 General Maintenance

 CAUTION Superb GreenLine 202
■ Only use the manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – there is a Superb N1 203
risk of damaging the trim. Approved tyre variants are first to be selected for the model variant (e.g. Su-
■ When using the anti-theft wheel bolt, ensure that it is in the hole in the
perb GreenLine), and then selected according to the engine size of your vehi-
valve area. cle.
■ If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order to
cool the brake system. If the model variant of your vehicle cannot be found in the discrete module,
then the approved tyre variants are to be selected according to the engine size
Note of your vehicle in module » page 202, Superb.
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Only use radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread
pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
Wheel bolts
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
Fig. 174 The information listed in the table corresponds to the information available at
Remove the cap the time of going to press.
The approved tyre / rim combinations for your car are given on the sales and
technical vehicle documentation.

Explanation of the tyre labelling

Explanation of tyre markings
For example, 225/50R 17 91 Tmeans:
 Read and observe and on page 197 first. 225 Tyre width in mm
Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the covering caps. 50 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
Pulling off
› Push the extraction pliers » page 205 sufficiently far onto the cap until the 17 Diameter of wheel in inches
inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap. 91 Load index
› Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 174. T Speed symbol
Fitting The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall (possibly on the inside).
› Push the cap onto the wheel bolt up to the stop. For example, DOT ... 11 14... means, for example, that the tyre was manufac-
tured in the 11th week of 2014.
Manufacturer-approved tyre variants
The marking M+Smeans that the associated tyre is suitable for winter use.
 Introduction Load index
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The load index indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre. 
Explanation of the tyre labelling 201
Superb 202

Wheels 201
 Load index Minimal
90 91 92 93 94 95 Tyre Minimal
Motorisation Speed
size Load index
Load icon
600 615 630 650 670 690
(In kg) 205/55 R16 91 V
Speed symbol 205/50 R17 93 V
1.8 l/112 kW TSI
The maximum speed symbol indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed 225/45 R17 91 V
with fitted tyres in each category. 225/40 R18 92 Y
Speed 205/55 R16 91 V
U H V W Y
icon 205/50 R17 93 V
1.8 l/118 kW TSI
Maximum 225/45 R17 91 V
speed 200 210 240 270 300 225/40 R18 92 Y
(in km/h)
205/50 R17 93 W
CAUTION 3.6 l/191 kW FSI 225/45 R17 91 W
The information about load index and speed symbol can be found in the vehi- 225/40 R18 92 Y
cle sales and technical documentation. 205/55 R16 91 V
205/50 R17 93 V
Superb 2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR
225/45 R17 91 V
Minimal 225/40 R18 92 Y
Tyre Minimal
Motorisation Speed 205/55 R16 91 V
size Load index
icon
205/50 R17 93 V
205/55 R16 91 H 2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR
225/45 R17 91 V
205/50 R17 93 H
1.4 l/92 kW TSI 225/40 R18 92 Y
225/45 R17 91 H
a) Applies only to vehicles with a rough road package.
225/40 R18 92 Y
205/55 R16 91 H Superb GreenLine
205/50 R17 93 H
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR Minimal
225/45 R17 91 H Tyre Minimal
Motorisation Speed
225/40 R18 92 Y size Load index
icon
205/55 R16 91 Va)
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR 205/55 R16 91 H
205/55 R16 91 W
2.0 l/147 kW TSI 205/50 R17 93 W
225/45 R17 91 W
225/40 R18 92 Y

202 General Maintenance

Superb N1 For the sake of the environment
Re-fit the summer tyres at an appropriate time as they provide better handling
Minimal properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and reduced tyre wear
Tyre Minimal
Motorisation Speed on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.
size Load index
icon The fuel consumption is also lower.
205/50 R17 93 W
3.6 l/191 kW FSI 225/45 R17 94 W Snow chains
225/40 R18 92 Y When driving in wintry road conditions, snow chains improve not only traction,
but also the braking performance.
Winter operation Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
 Introduction
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the follow-
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ing wheel/tyre combinations.
Winter tyres 203
Wheel size Depth D Tyre size
Snow chains 203
7J x 16a) 45 mm 205/55 R16
Winter tyres 6J x 16a) 50 mm 205/55 R16
6J x 17 45 mm 205/50 R17
Summer tyres have less grip on ice, snow and at temperatures below 7 °C. This
a) Not valid for vehicles with 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.
is especially true of low-profile tyres or high-speed tyres.
Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your vehicle when Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains » page 200.
driving in wintry road conditions.
WARNING
To get best possible handling, winter tyres must be fitted to all four wheels. Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains.
The minimum tread depth must be 4 mm.
Winter tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol) of a lower speed CAUTION
category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these The chains are to be removed when driving on snow-free paths. They would
tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is otherwise cause loss of performance and damage the tyres.
higher.
Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by ŠKODA for
your model of vehicle.
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the Win-
ter tyres menu item » page 47.

Wheels 203
 First-aid box
Do-it-yourself The compartment for stowing the first-aid box is located in the right of the
boot » Fig. 175.
Emergency equipment and self-help
Warning triangle
Emergency equipment The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber
straps » Fig. 176.
 Introduction
WARNING
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The first-aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that
Placement of the first-aid kit and warning triangle 204 they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle
fire extinguisher 204 collision which could cause injuries to occupants.
Vehicle tool kit 205
Note
Placement of the first-aid kit and warning triangle ■ Pay attention to the expiration date of the first-aid kit.
■ We recommend using a first-aid kit from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which
are available from a ŠKODA Partner.

fire extinguisher

Fig. 177
Fire extinguisher

Fig. 175 Stowage compartment for the first-aid kit: Superb / Superb Com-
bi

Fig. 176 The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the driver's
Placing of the warning triangle seat.
Removing/attaching
› Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 177.
› Remove the fire extinguisher.
› For mounting, fit the fire extinguisher back into the holder and secure it with
straps.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin-
guisher. 

204 Do-it-yourself
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year. 4 Towing eye
National legal requirements must be observed. 5 Clamps for removing the wheel trims
6 Depending upon vehicle equipment: Jack with sign / puncture repair kit
WARNING
7 Wheel wrench
The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not
come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision 8 Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps
which could cause injuries to occupants. 9 Replacement bulb set

WARNING
Note
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
■ The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements.
Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads.
■ Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. Proper function-
ing of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date.
■ The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only. CAUTION
■ Screw the jack back into the starting position before storing in the box with
Vehicle tool kit the tool kit.
■ Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot.
■ Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.

Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.

Changing a wheel

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Preliminary work 206
Changing a wheel 206
Follow-up work 206
Fig. 178 Vehicle tool kit Loosening/tightening wheel bolts 207
Raising the vehicle 207
The vehicle tool kit is housed in a box in the spare wheel or in the compart- Anti-theft wheel bolts 208 
ment for the spare wheel underneath the floor covering in the luggage com-
partment. The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel.
Depending on the equipment, not all the components listed in the on-board
tool kit have to be contained in it.
1 Screwdriver
2 Spanner for removing and installing the tail light
3 Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts

Emergency equipment and self-help 205

 WARNING › Remove the vehicle tool kit » page 205and the spare wheel » page 200from
■ If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system the boot.
and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national le-
gal requirements must be observed. Changing a wheel
■ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on
as flat and firm a surface as possible.
 Read and observe on page 206 first.
■ The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently
When changing a wheel, the following instructions must be followed.
fitted with tyres or rims that differ from the factory fitted ones » page 201,
Explanation of the tyre labelling. › Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
› First of all slacken the anti-theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts.
WARNING › Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the
ground.
Information on the wheel bolts
■ The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. Never treat them
› Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
with grease or oil.
■ The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light al-
› Remove the wheel carefully.
loy wheels is 120 Nm.
› Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
■ If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
› Lower the vehicle.
can come loose when the car is moving. A tightening torque which is too
› Tighten the opposite wheel bolts alternately (cross-wise) with the wheel
wrench. Tighten the anti-theft wheel bolt last.
high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent
deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.
› Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
■ In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the indication is cor-
when the car is moving. rect » page 197.

WARNING
Note
If it is established when changing a wheel that the wheel bolts are corro-
The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel.
ded and difficult to move, then these must be replaced.
Preliminary work
Follow-up work
 Read and observe on page 206 first.
 Read and observe on page 206 first.
Before changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
› Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while › Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special
the wheel is being changed. bolt » page 200.
› Switch off the engine. › Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the strap.
› Select the 1st gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission › Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible.
in the P-position. › Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque
› Apply the handbrake firmly. wrench as soon as possible. 
› Uncouple a trailer.

206 Do-it-yourself
After changing the wheel, the tyre pressure should be adjusted. In vehicles WARNING
with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor- ■ Undo the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) provided that the vehi-
ed » page 166. cle has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could become loose
Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair op- and fall off.
■ If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end
tions.
of the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
WARNING make sure you keep your footing.
Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque
has been checked. Raising the vehicle

Loosening/tightening wheel bolts Fig. 180

Jacking points for positioning
Fig. 179 lifting jack
Changing a wheel: Loosening the
wheel bolts

 Read and observe on page 206 first.

Before removing the wheel bolts, the caps for the wheel bolts must be pulled
off.
Releasing
› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop1).
› Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 179.
Tightening Fig. 181 Attach lifting jack
› Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop1).
› Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar-  Read and observe on page 206 first.
row » Fig. 179 until it is tight.
In order to raise the vehicle, the jack from the tool kit is to be used.
After tightening the wheel bolts, the covering caps must be replaced.
Position the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre . 

1) Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 208.

Emergency equipment and self-help 207

The mounting points are located on the metal bar of the lower sill on the un- Anti-theft wheel bolts
derside of your vehicle. The positions of these are embossed by means of
markings on the side surface of the lower sill » Fig. 181.
Fig. 182
› Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground Principle sketch: Anti-theft
and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking wheel bolt with adapter
point » Fig. 181 - .
› Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up
until its claw encloses the web » Fig. 181 - .
› Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the
ground.
WARNING
Notes for vehicle lifting  Read and observe on page 206 first.
■ Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle.
■ If the wheel has to be changed on a slope, first of all block the opposite
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. These can only be
loosened or tightened with the use of adapter B » Fig. 182.
wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpect-
edly rolling away. › Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
■ Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent › Insert adapter B » Fig. 182 with the toothed side all the way into the inner
possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move teeth in the head of the anti-theft wheel bolts A .
the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always nec- › Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop.
essary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable › Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt » page 207.
base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth, › Remove the adapter.
such as cobbled stones, tiled floor, etc. › Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
■ Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur-
To be equipped for a possible wheel change, the adapter for the anti-theft
pose.
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle. The adapter is stowed in the
■ Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs under the vehicle,
tool kit.
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack. Note
■ When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
■ Note the code number which is embossed both on the adapter and also on
the end of each anti-theft wheel bolt. This number can be used to purchase a
CAUTION replacement adapter from ŠKODA Original Parts if necessary.
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the web of the ■ The anti-theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a ŠKODA
lower fork leg, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle occurring. Partner.

208 Do-it-yourself
Puncture set WARNING (Continued)
■ The sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into
 Introduction contact with the skin.
■ Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Components of the puncture repair kits 209 For the sake of the environment
Preparations for using the breakdown kit 210 Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in
Sealing and inflating the tyre 210 accordance with environmental protection regulations.
Notes for driving with tyre repaired 211
Note
Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies ■ A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Parts.
or a puncture with diameters up to approx. 4 mm. ■ Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit, or
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma- consult a specialist garage about repair options.
nent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga- ■ The national legal requirements must be observed when repairing a tyre.
rage.
The wheel need not be removed during the repair.
Components of the puncture repair kits

Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances.
› There is damage to the rim.
› The outside temperature is less than -20 °C.
› The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size.
› There is damage to the tyre wall.
› Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre.
› If the use-by-date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
WARNING
■ If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system
and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national le-
gal requirements must be observed.
■ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on Fig. 183 Principle sketch: Components of the breakdown kit
as flat and firm a surface as possible.
 Read and observe on page 209 first.
WARNING Components of the set » Fig. 183
■ A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a stand-
1 Valve remover
ard tyre.
2 Sticker with “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph” speed designation
■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering. 3 Inflation hose with plug
4 Air compressor
5 Tyre inflation hose 

Emergency equipment and self-help 209

6 Tyre inflation pressure indicator Sealing and inflating the tyre
7 Air release valve
8 ON and OFF switch  Read and observe on page 209 first.
9 12 volt cable connector Sealing
10 Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent › Shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 » Fig. 183 on page 209 vigorously several
11 Replacement valve core times.
The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core. › Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clock-
wise direction. The film on the cap is pierced automatically.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart- › Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto
ment. This contains a sealing means and an air compressor. the tyre valve.
Note
› Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log › Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve.
folder. › Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 .
Inflating
Preparations for using the breakdown kit
› Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 5 » Fig. 183 on page 209 firmly
 Read and observe on page 209 first. onto the tyre valve.
› Check that the air release valve 7 is closed.
The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the puncture › Start the engine and run it in idle.
repair kit. › Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket » page 91, Cigarette lighter.
› Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the › Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 .
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while › Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved.
the wheel is being changed. Maximum run time of 8 minutes » .
› Switch off the engine. › Switch off the air compressor.
› Select the 1st gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission › If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
in the P-position. hose 5 from the tyre valve.
› Apply the handbrake firmly. › Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
› Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit » page 209. to “distribute” in the tyre.
› Uncouple a trailer. › Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat
› Remove the breakdown kit from the boot. the inflation process.
› Stick the appropriate sticker 2 » Fig. 183 on page 209 onto the dashboard in › If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this
the driver's field of view. means the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre
› Unscrew the valve cap. with the breakdown kit » .
› Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean › Switch off the air compressor.
surface (rag, paper, etc.). › Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve.
Once a tyre pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is reached, the journey may be continued
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). 

210 Do-it-yourself
 WARNING WARNING
■ If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage ■ Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to work in the engine
sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the compartment » page 186.
tyre.  Do not continue to drive! Seek help from a specialist garage. ■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be- low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not jump-start with the battery of an-
ing inflated – there is a risk of burning. other vehicle – there is a risk of explosion.
■ Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes, etc.)
CAUTION away from the battery – risk of explosion!
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest – there is a
risk of overheating. Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before explosion and chemical burns.
■ The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
switching it on again.

Notes for driving with tyre repaired Note

We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.
 Read and observe on page 209 first.

The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
minutes.
Fig. 184
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less Jump-starting: A – flat battery, B
›  Do not continue to drive! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the – battery providing current
breakdown kit.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more
› Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value.
› Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

Jump-starting  Read and observe on page 211 first.

 Introduction The starting process using the battery of another vehicle requires the use of
jumper cables.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle 211 › Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery
Jump-starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 212 A » Fig. 184.
Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot 212 › Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B .
› Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B .
The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump-start your vehicle if the en- › Attach clamp 4 to a solid metal component firmly connected to the engine
gine will not start because the battery is flat. block or to the engine block itself.
Starting engine
› Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle. 

Emergency equipment and self-help 211

› Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Jump-starting in vehicles with the START STOP system
› If the engine does not start, halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec-
onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process.
› Remove the jumper cables exactly in the reverse sequence as for clamping. Fig. 185
Engine earth: START STOP sys-
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the bat- tem
tery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of
the discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps. Obey the instructions of the jump-start cable manu-
facturer.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is red.
 Read and observe on page 211 first.

Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is black. The jump-start cable must only be connected to the engine earthing point on
vehicles with the START STOP system » Fig. 185.
WARNING
■ Do not clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the dis- Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot
charged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being star- Fig. 186
ted. Detail of the engine compart-
■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
ment: Jump-starting point
other – there is a risk of short circuit.
■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle
– there is a risk of short circuit.
■ Route the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotat-
ing parts in the engine compartment.
■ There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise cur-
rent may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.  Read and observe on page 211 first.

On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot, the positive terminal of the
battery supplying the power can only be connected to the jump-starting point
in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jump-
start cable » Fig. 186.
› Open the protective cap of the jump-starting point in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 186.
› Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the
jump-starting point.
› Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid
metal part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself.
› Start the engine. 

212 Do-it-yourself
› After starting the engine, close the protective cap of the jump-starting point. Driver of the towed vehicle
› Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that
Towing the vehicle the turn signal lights, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can
be used.
 Introduction › Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. If the engine is not running, significantly more physical force
is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle.
If using a tow rope, ensure that it is always kept taught.
Both drivers should be familiar with the problems which might possibly occur
while a vehicle is being towed. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in
another vehicle or to be towed in.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it
Fig. 187 Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing dis-
tance is greater than 50 km.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
WARNING
Front towing eye 214 ■ When towing, respect the national legal provisions, especially those
Rear towing eye 214 which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle be-
Vehicles with a tow hitch 214 ing towed.
■ When towing, exercise increased caution.
For towing a braided tow rope is to be used » Fig. 187- .
■ For towing no spiral tow rope is to be used » Fig. 187- , the towing eye
The following guidelines must be observed when towing. may unscrew out of the vehicle - there is a risk of accidents.
Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow ■ The tow rope should not be twisted - there is a risk of accidents.
rope or with the front or rear wheels raised.
CAUTION
Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the auto- ■ Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
matic gearbox is damaged! catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid » page 211, Jump-starting.
Driver of the tow vehicle ■ If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, your vehicle must only be towed
› Engage the clutch gently when starting off or depress the accelerator partic- with the front axle raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or
ularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox. trailer.
› Only then, approach correctly when the rope is taut. ■ To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should

The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h. be elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a
similarly elastic material. 

Emergency equipment and self-help 213

■ There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the Rear towing eye
points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
■ Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes » page 214, Front
towing eye or » page 214, Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the
towing equipment » page 166.

Note
We recommend using a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which is
available from a ŠKODA Partner.

Front towing eye

Fig. 189 Removing the cap / installing the towing eye

 Read and observe and on page 213 first.

› Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper » Fig. 189 -  and
remove it.
› Screw-in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » Fig. 189 - 
and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend,
for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a
similar object that can be pushed through the eye.
› After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place.
Fig. 188 Removing the cap / installing the towing eye The cap must engage firmly.
 Read and observe and on page 213 first. On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
screw-in towing eye behind the cap » page 214, Vehicles with a tow hitch.
› Remove the cap from the front bumper » Fig. 188 - .
› Screw-in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » Fig. 188 -  CAUTION
and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend, The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, other-
for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a wise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
similar object that can be pushed through the eye.
› After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place. Vehicles with a tow hitch
The cap must engage firmly.
 Read and observe and on page 213 first.
WARNING
On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, there is no mount for the
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, oth-
screw-in towing eye behind the cap.
erwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Use the built-in detachable ball rod for towing » page 166, Hitch.
Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to
using the towing eye. 

214 Do-it-yourself
If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the Replacing the battery in the remote control key
standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the
towing eye.
If this procedure is not observed, the vehicle may not meet the national legal
provisions.

CAUTION
The detachable ball rod and/or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable
tow bar is used.

Note
The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for
towing, if necessary. Fig. 190 Remove cover/take out battery

Radio remote control  Read and observe on page 215 first.

The battery change is carried out as follows.

 Introduction
› Flip out the key.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: › Press off the battery cover A » Fig. 190 with your thumb or by using a
Replacing the battery in the remote control key 215 screwdriver release in the region of arrow 1 .
Synchronising the remote control 215 › Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in
Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater (parking the region of the arrow 2 .
heater) 216 › Insert the new battery.
› Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
CAUTION
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
■ The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original with the remote control key after replacing the battery » page 215.
battery.
■ We recommend having faulty batteries replaced by a ŠKODA service partner. Note
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat-
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions.
Synchronising the remote control
 Read and observe on page 215 first.

If the vehicle does not unlock when the remote control is pressed, the key may
not be synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the remote control
key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the
equipment or the battery in the remote control key has been replaced.
Synchronise the key as follows. 

Emergency equipment and self-help 215

› Press any button on the remote control key. Unlocking/locking the driver's door
› Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Fig. 192
Handle on the driver's door: cov-
Replace the battery in the remote control of the auxiliary heater
ered key cylinder
(parking heater)

Fig. 191
Radio remote control: Battery
cover

The driver's door can be unlocked or locked in an emergency.

› Pull on the door handle and hold it pulled.
› Insert the vehicle key into the slot on the underside of the cover in the re-
gion of the arrow » Fig. 192.
 Read and observe on page 215 first. › Fold the cover upwards.
› Release the door handle.
The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote con- › Insert the remote control key into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the ve-
trol » Fig. 191. hicle.
› For vehicles with LHD insert the remote control key with the buttons facing
› Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover. up into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
› Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the › For vehicles with RHD insert the remote control key directed with buttons
cover. down into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
› Replace the battery.
› Return the battery cover. Pull on the door handle and install the cover to the original location.
› Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking, engage. CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock-
Emergency unlocking/locking ing/unlocking.

 Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking/locking the driver's door 216
Locking the door without a locking cylinder 217
Unlocking the boot lid 217
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 217

216 Do-it-yourself
Locking the door without a locking cylinder Unlocking (Superb Combi)
› Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim as far as the
stop » Fig. 194 - .
Fig. 193 › Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Left rear door: Emergency lock- › Open the boot lid.
ing
Selector lever-emergency unlocking

An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors

which have no locking cylinder. It is only visible after opening the door.
› Remove the cover A » Fig. 193.
› Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the
direction of the arrow (mirror-inverted on the right doors).
› Replace the cover.
Fig. 195 Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Unlocking the boot lid
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Grasp the cover 1 in the area of arrow 2 » Fig. 195 and carefully pull up-
wards.
› Also unlock the cover on the other side.
› Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› At the same time, press the locking button in the selector lever and move
the selector lever to N.
The selector lever will be locked once more if it is moved again to P.

Emergency operation of the sliding/tilting roof

Fig. 194 Emergency unlocking: Superb / Superb Combi  Introduction
The boot lid can be unlocked manually in an emergency. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking (Superb) Operation 218
› Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the Activation after unclamping and reclamping the battery 218
stop » Fig. 194 - .
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
› Open the boot lid.

Emergency equipment and self-help 217

 Operation Activation after unclamping and reclamping the battery
The panoramic sliding/tilting roof (referred to form now on as just the sliding/
tiling roof) and the sun screen must be activated after disconnecting and re-
connecting the battery.
To activate the sliding/tilting roof, press the notch on the control dial down-
wards and forwards for approx. 10 seconds.
To activate the sun screen, press and hold the switch G » Fig. 48 on
page 66for approx. 10 seconds.
If the sliding/tilting roof or sun screen is not fully closed or pushed shut when
disconnecting and reconnecting the battery, they must first be closed or push-
Fig. 196 Point for positioning screwdriver/opening for positioning the ed shut » page 66, Opening/closing the sun screen » page 66, Operation. Only
key then is it possible to perform the activation.

The sliding/tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if a fault occurs. The
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
emergency operation of the sliding/tilting roof is located underneath the
glasses storage box 1 » page 93, Glasses storage box.  Introduction
› Open the glasses storage box. This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
› Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the
positions shown by the arrows 1 » Fig. 196. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 219
› Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down Replacing the rear window wiper blade 219
and turning the screwdriver.
› Insert an Allen key, SW 4, up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or WARNING
open the sliding/tilting roof. Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
› Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
pushing the entire part upwards.
Have the fault on the sliding tilting roof rectified as soon as possible by a spe-
cialist garage.
Note
■ It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding/tilting
roof into the basic position.1) This is why the rotary switch must be set to posi-
tion A » Fig. 46 on page 64 and pressed forwards for about 10 seconds.
■ After each emergency operation, it is necessary to activate the
roof2) » page 218.

1) Applies to emergency operation of the Superb sliding/tilting roof.

2) Applies to emergency operation of the Superb Combi sliding/tilting roof.

218 Do-it-yourself
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 197 Fig. 198

Windscreen wiper blade Rear window wiper blade

 Read and observe on page 218 first.  Read and observe on page 218 first.

Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms Removing the wiper blade
into the service position. › Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Service position for changing wiper blades
› Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism
1 » Fig. 198.
› Close the bonnet. › Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Switch the ignition on and off again.
› Within 10 seconds, press the lever in position 4 and hold it in position for Fitting the wiper blade
around 2 seconds » Fig. 63 on page 78. › Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the service position. › Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Removing the wiper blade
› Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
› Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism
1 » Fig. 197.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 .
Fitting the wiper blade
› Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop.
› Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen.
› Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position 4 » Fig. 63 on page 78.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position.

Emergency equipment and self-help 219

 CAUTION
Fuses and light bulbs
■ “Never repair” fuses or replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage –
Fuses there is a risk of fire. This may also cause damage at another part of the elec-
trical system.
 Introduction ■ A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip. Replace the faulty
fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: ■ If a newly inserted fuse burns through again, then a specialist should be con-

Fuses in the dash panel 220 sulted immediately.

Fuses in the engine compartment 222 Note
Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment 222 ■ We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. A box of
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. replacement fuses can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■ There can be multiple power consuming devices for one fuse.
Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before ■ A single consumer may use several fuses.
replacing a fuse.
Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat- Fuses in the dash panel
ing » page 220, Fuses in the dash panel or » page 222, Assignment of fuses in
the engine compartment.
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
eliminated.
Fuse colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
dark brown 7.5
red 10
blue 15 Fig. 199 Cover of the fuse box in the control panel / fuses
yellow 20
 Read and observe and on page 220 first.
white 25
green 30 The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover.
orange 40 Replacing fuses
red 50 › Remove the cover.» Fig. 199
› Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dash
WARNING panel.
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the › Place the clamp on the respective fuse and pull this fuse out.
engine compartment » page 186. › Insert a new fuse.
› Replace the clamp in the original position.
› Reinsert the cover of the fuse box . 

220 Do-it-yourself
Fuse assignment in the dash panel No. Consumer
No. Consumer 27 Fuel pump relay, control unit for fuel pump, injection valves
Diagnostic socket, engine control unit, fuel pump relay, fuel pump 28 Electric boot lid
1
control unit 29 Haldex
ABS control unit, ESC switch for tyre pressure warning, brake sen- 30 Climate controlled front seats
2
sor, for START STOP coil of the starter relay only
31 DVD preinstallation
3 Switch and airbag control unit
32 Front power window, central locking system of the rear doors
WIV, tail lights, dimming mirrors, pressure sensor, telephone prein-
4 33 Electric sliding/tilting roof
stallation
34 Alarm, spare horn
Control unit for headlight beam adjustment and headlight swivel,
5 35 front and rear lighter
control unit for parking aid, control unit for park assist
Instrument cluster, control unit for electromechanical power steer- 36 Headlight cleaning system
6
ing, selector lever lock, power supply for data bus 37 Heated front seats
7 Heated opening of the crankcase ventilation, air flow meter 38 Heated rear seats
8 Control unit for trailer detection 39 Rear window wiper
9 Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation Fan air conditioning system, relay for auxiliary heating and ventila-
40
10 Adaptive left main headlight tion
11 Adaptive right main headlight 41 Not assigned
12 Not assigned 42 Light switch
13 Diagnostic socket, light switch, rain sensor, clock 43 Control unit for trailer detection
14 Central locking system and bonnet lid 44 Control unit for trailer detection
15 Central control unit - interior lights 45 Control unit for trailer detection
16 The air conditioning system 46 Switch for seat heating
17 Not assigned 47 Telephone preinstallation
18 Telephone 48 Preparation for the aftermarket radio
Instrument cluster, operating lever under the steering wheel, relay Only for START STOP: Central control unit, DC-DC converter, the en-
19 49
coil for heated windscreen gine control unit
20 KESSY
21 KESSY ELV
22 Air blower for Climatronic
23 Front power window, central locking of the front doors
24 Selector lever lock
25 Rear window heater, relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
26 Power socket in the boot

Fuses and light bulbs 221

Fuses in the engine compartment Assignment of fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 200
Cover for the fuse box in the en-
gine compartment

 Read and observe and on page 220 first. Fig. 201 Fuses: Type A / Type B
On some vehicles, the battery cover must be removed before removing the
cover for the fuse box » page 195.
 Read and observe and on page 220 first.

Replacing fuses Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version A

› Move the safety catch of the cover of the fuse box A » Fig. 200in the direc- No. Consumer
tion of the arrow.
1 Front right main headlight, right tail light
The symbol is displayed behind the catches. . 2 Valves for ABS
› Remove the cover. 3-4 Not assigned
› Replace the appropriate fuse. 5 Horn
› Place the cover on top of the fuse box. 6-12 Not assigned
› Turn the securing bracket A in opposite direction of the arrow.
13 Control unit for automatic gearbox
The symbol is displayed behind the catches .
14 Not assigned
The cover is locked into position.
15 Coolant pump
CAUTION 16 Not assigned
The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied 17 Instrument cluster, windscreen wiper lever, and turn signal lever
correctly. Water may get into the fuse box if the cover is not replaced properly 18 Audio amplifier (sound system)
- there is a risk of damage to the vehicle!
19 Radio
20 - 22 Not assigned
23 Engine control unit
24 Data bus control unit
25 - 26 Not assigned
27 Fuel dosage valve
28 Engine control unit 

222 Do-it-yourself
 No. Consumer No. Consumer
29 Main relay 11 Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit
30 Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit 12 Data bus control unit
31 Windscreen wipers 13 Engine control unit
32 - 37 Not assigned 14 Ignition
38 Radiator fan, valves Lambda probe (petrol engine), glow plug system relay and fuel
15
39 Clutch/brake pad sensor pump (diesel engine)
40 Lambda probe 16 Front right main headlight, right tail light
41 AKF valve 17 Horn
42 Lambda probe 18 Audio amplifier (sound system)
43 Ignition 19 Windscreen wipers
44 - 46 Not assigned 20 Valve for metering fuel, coolant pump, high-pressure pump
47 Front left main headlight, left tail light 21 Lambda probe
48 Pump for ABS 22 Clutch pedal switch
49 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on) 23 Coil of the coolant pump relay valves, high-pressure pump
50 - 51 Not assigned 24 Radiator fan
52 Power supply relay - terminal Xa) 25 Pump for ABS
53 Power to the internal fuse carrier 26 Front left main headlight, left tail light
54 Not assigned 27 Control unit for glow plug system
a)
28 Windscreen heater
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off. 29 Power to the internal fuse carrier
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version B 30 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)
No. Consumer a) In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off.
1 Not assigned
2 Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Replacing bulbs
3 Measuring circuit
4 Valves for ABS  Introduction
5 Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
6 Not assigned Headlights 224
7 Power supply relay - terminal Xa) Replacing the low beam bulb 224
8 Radio Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 225
9 Not assigned Replacing bulb for main beam 225
10 Engine control unit, Main relay Replacing the bulb for the fog light 225 

Fuses and light bulbs 223

Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 226 Headlights
Rear light (Superb Combi) 226
Replacing bulbs in rear light (Superb Combi) 227
Some manual skills are required to change a bulb. For this reason, we recom-
mend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help
in the event of any uncertainties.
› Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
› Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
› A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in
the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot.
Fig. 202 Bulb arrangement: Headlight with halogen bulb/with Xenon
WARNING
bulb
■ Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 186.  Read and observe and on page 224 first.
■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul- Headlight with halogen bulb
ty by other road users. 1 Low beam
■ Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the 2 Main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light
bulb - risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb. Headlights with Xenon light
■ Gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, professio- 3 Xenon gas discharge bulbs
nal knowledge is required – risk of death! 4 Main beam
■ Switch off the respective vehicle light when changing the bulb.

Replacing the low beam bulb

CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest Fig. 203
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, Halogen headlight: Changing the
napkin, or similar. bulb for the low beam
Note
■ This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos-
sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the ve-
hicle. Replacement bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODAOriginal Accessories.
■ We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage  Read and observe and on page 224 first.
after replacing a bulb in the main beam, low beam or fog lights.
■ In case of failure of a xenon gas discharge lamp or an LED diode, visit a spe- › Remove the protective cap 1 » Fig. 202 on page 224. 

cialist garage.

224 Do-it-yourself
› Turn the plug with the bulb A » Fig. 203as far as the stop in the direction of
Replacing bulb for main beam
the arrow.
› Change the bulb.
› Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti-clockwise direc-
tion as far as the stop.
› Fit the protective cover 1 .
Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights

Fig. 204
Halogen headlight: Replacing
the bulb for main beam and sep-
arate daytime running lights Fig. 205 Headlights with Xenon light: Changing the bulb for the main
beam

 Read and observe and on page 224 first.

› Unlock the protective cap in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 205 and remove.
› Turn the plug with bulb C anti-clockwise to the stop and remove it.
 Read and observe and on page 224 first. › Change the bulb.
› Remove the protective cap 2 » Fig. 202 on page 224. › Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in an anti-clockwise direc-
tion as far as the stop.
› Turn the bulb holder A » Fig. 204in the direction of the arrow as far as the › Insert the protective cap in holder 2 and carefully push in.
stop.
› Replace the bulb, insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in the The protective cover must engage firmly.
opposite direction to that of the arrow as far as it goes.
› Fit the protective cover 2 . Replacing the bulb for the fog light

Fig. 206 Front bumper: Remove the protective grille/fog light 

Fuses and light bulbs 225

 Fig. 207 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light
Replacing the light bulb

 Read and observe and on page 224 first.

Removing the protective grille Fig. 208 Remove the number plate light/replace the bulb
› Undo the protective grille in the area of the arrow » Fig. 206 -  using the
clamp for removing the wheel trims » page 205, Vehicle tool kit.  Read and observe and on page 224 first.
› Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 1 .
Changing light bulbs for fog lights
› Open the boot lid.
› Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the fog lamp » Fig. 206 - . › Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 208.

› Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 . The lamp comes loose.
› Remove the connector. › Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it.
› Turn bulb holder A » Fig. 207 in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3.
and remove. › Insert a new bulb into the holder.
› Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn in a › Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 .
clockwise direction as far as the stop. › Push on the light until the spring clicks into place.
› Attach the connector.
› Replace the fog lamp by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow Check that the light is securely inserted.
2 » Fig. 206 -  and screw tight.
› Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in. Rear light (Superb Combi)
The protective grille must engage firmly.

Fig. 209 Removing: Cover/light 

226 Do-it-yourself
 CAUTION
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when re-
moving and installing the tail lamp.

Replacing bulbs in rear light (Superb Combi)

Fig. 211
Replacing the light bulb

Fig. 210 Seal expand / lighting connector

 Read and observe and on page 224 first.

Removing
› Open the boot lid.
› Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims » page 205, Vehicle tool kit  Read and observe and on page 224 first.
into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow » Fig. 209 - .
› Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 209 - . › Turn the bulb holder 2 » Fig. 211 in an anti-clockwise direction and remove it
from the lamp housing.
› Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp » Fig. 209 - . › Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to
› Grasp the rear light and carefully remove away from the direction of travel. the stop and remove.
› Remove the rubber seal in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 210 - . › Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
› Pull off the cable bundle with the plug cap » Fig. 210 - . stop.
› Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of arrow › Replace the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clock-
2 » Fig. 210 - .
wise direction to the stop.
› Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction
of the arrow 3 .
Fitting
› Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely.
› Install the rubber seal in the body in the opposite direction to arrow 1 in-
stall » Fig. 210 - .
› Insert the tail lamp with the holes 1 » Fig. 211 on page 227 into the bolts on
the body » Fig. 210 - .
› Carefully press the tail light into the bolts on the bodywork.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not become pinched between the body
and the lamp.
› Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover.
› Ensure that the cover engages firmly.

Fuses and light bulbs 227

 Vehicle data sticker
Technical data The vehicle data sticker » Fig. 212 -  is located on the base of the luggage
compartment and is also fixed into the service schedule.
Technical data
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
Vehicle data 1 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 Vehicle type
 Introduction
3 Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
This chapter contains information on the following subjects: code
Vehicle identification data 228 4 Partial vehicle description
Operating weight and payload 229 Type plate
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE The type plate » Fig. 212 -  is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
Regulations and EU Directives 229 right driver's side.
Dimensions 230 The type plate contains the following data.
Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type 231
5 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Multi-purpose vehicles (AF) 235
6 Maximum permissible gross weight1)
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece- 7 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
8 Maximum permissible front axle load
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc- 9 Maximum permissible rear axle load
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle identification data The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped on
the right-hand suspension strut dome in the engine compartment. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left-hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
Engine number
The engine number (three-digit code letter and serial number) is stamped onto
the engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents.

WARNING
Fig. 212 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci-
dent and damage!

1) For vehicles with a factory fitted towing device and sports suspension, the value is reduced by 25 kg.

228 Technical data

Operating weight and payload The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.
Operating weight
This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional Note
weight-increasing equipment such as air conditioning system, spare wheel, or ■ The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the ŠKODA websites or in
trailer hitch. the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in
accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by legal or techni-
The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only.
cal rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehi-
The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver (75 kg), the weight cles.
of the operating fluids, the tool kit, and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity. ■ Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
Operating weight of the vehicle » page 231, Vehicle-specific information de-
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from
pending on engine type.
the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commer-
Payload cial and technical vehicle documentation.
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
› The weight of the passengers.
› The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
› The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
› The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
› Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer (max. 80 kg).
Note
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.

Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to

ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.

Technical data 229

 Dimensions

Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)

Superb Superb GreenLine Superb Combi Superb Combi GreenLine
Length 4833 4833 4833 4833
Width 1817 1817 1817 1817
Width including exterior mirror 2009 2009 2009 2009
Height 1462/1482 a)/ 1447b) 1464/1449b) 1511/1529 a)/ 1497b) 1511/1496b)
Clearance 139/159a)/124b)/141c) 140/125b) 141/159a)/127b)/140c) 141/126b)
Wheel base 2761 2761 2761 2761
1545/1518 1545/1517
Track gauge front/rear 1545/1518 1545/1517
(1537/1510)c) (1537/1510)c)
a) Applies to vehicles with a rough road package.
b) Applies to vehicles with a sport chassis.
c) Applies to vehicles with a 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.

230 Technical data

 Vehicle-specific information depending on engine type
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
1.4 l/92 kW TSI Motor
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
92/5000 200/1500 - 4000 4/1390

Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb Combi MG6

Top speed (km/h) 204 203
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.5 10.6
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1467 - 1615 1489 - 1647
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1400 / 1500
a) b)

Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 730 740

a) Slopes up to 12 %
b) Slopes up to 8 %

1.8 l/112 kW TSI Motor

Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
112/4300 - 6200 250/1500 - 4200 4/1798

Su- Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi

Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7
perb MG6 4x4 MG6 DSG7 MG6 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 219 218 215 217 216 213
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 8.8 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.8 8.9
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1496 - 1654 1508 - 1666 1587 - 1745 1518 - 1676 1530 - 1688 1609 - 1767
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1500 / 1700
a) b)
1600 / 1800
a) b)
1500 / 1700
a) b)
1600 a)/ 1800b)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a) Slopes up to 12 %
b) Slopes up to 8 % 

Technical data 231

1.8 l/118 kW TSI Motor
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
118/4500 - 6200 250/1500 - 4500 4/1798

Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi

Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb MG6 4x4
MG6 DSG7 MG6 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 222 222 219 221 221 218
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 8.2 8.4 8.4 8.3 8.5 8.5
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1496 - 1654 1508 - 1666 1587 - 1745 1518 - 1676 1530 - 1688 1609 - 1767
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1500 / 1700
a) b)
1600 / 1800
a) b)
1500 / 1700
a) b)
1600 a)/ 1800b)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a) Slopes up to 12 %
b) Slopes up to 8 %

2.0 l/147 kW TSI Motor

Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
147/5100 - 6000 280/1700 - 5000 4/1984

Performance and Weights Superb DSG6 Superb Combi DSG6

Top speed (km/h) 240 238
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 7.7 7.8
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1540 - 1698 1562 - 1720
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1600 / 1800
a) b)

Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750

a) Slopes up to 12 %
b) Slopes up to 8 % 

232 Technical data

3.6 ltr/191 kW FSI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
191/6000 350/2500 - 5000 6/3597

Performance and Weights Superb DSG6 4 x 4 Superb Combi DSG6 4 x 4

Top speed (km/h) 250 250
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 6.4 6.5
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1704 - 1860 1726 - 1882
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 2000
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
77/4400 250/1500 - 2500 4/1598

Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG7
Top speed (km/h) 194/197a) 193 192/195a) 192
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 12.1/12.2a) 12.2 12.2/12.3a) 12.3
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment 1512 - 1670 1534 - 1692
1519 - 1677 1541 - 1699
configuration (1519 - 1615)a) (1541 - 1699)a)
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1500 b)/ 1700c) 1200 b)/ 1400c) 1500 b)/ 1700c) 1200 b)/ 1400c)
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
a) GreenLine
b) Slopes up to 12 %
c) Slopes up to 8 % 

Technical data 233

2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
103/4200 320/1750 - 2500 4/1968

Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi

Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 Superb MG6 4x4
MG6 DSG6 MG6 4x4
Top speed (km/h) 212 212 210 211 210 208
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.0 10.1 10.3 10.1 10.2 10.4
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1532 - 1690 1554 - 1712 1609 - 1767 1554 - 1712 1576 - 1734 1631 - 1789
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1800 2000 1800 2000
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750
2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
125/4200 350/1750 - 2500 4/1968

Superb DSG6 4 Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi

Performance and Weights Superb MG6 Superb DSG6
x4 MG6 DSG6 DSG6 4 x 4
Top speed (km/h) 228 222 219 226 221 218
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 8.6 8.6 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.8
Operating weight (kg) - depending on equipment
1540 - 1698 1557 - 1715 1634 - 1792 1562 - 1720 1579 - 1735 1656 - 1814
configuration
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) 1800 2000 1800 2000
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 750

234 Technical data

 Multi-purpose vehicles (AF)
Engine Maximum permissible gross weight (kg)
MG6
1.4 l/92 kW TSI
2032
MG6 DSG7 MG6 4 x 4
1.8 l/118 kW TSI
2061 2073 2152
DSG6
2.0 l/147 kW TSI
2105
DSG6 4 x 4
3.6 l/191 kW FSI
2267
MG6 DSG7
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR
2077/2084a) 2084
2.0 l/103 kW TDI MG6 DSG6 MG6 4 x 4
CR 2097 2119 2174
2.0 l/125 kW TDI MG6 DSG6 DSG6 4 x 4
CR 2105 2122 2199
a) GreenLine

Technical data 235

 Airbag system 16 Automatic gearbox
Index Selector lever-emergency unlocking 217
Air conditioning system 110
Air outlets 110 Starting off and driving 147
A Tiptronic 146
Climatronic 115
Abroad Manual air conditioning system 112 Using the selector lever 145
Driving abroad 153 Air outlets 110 Automatic gearbox modes 145
Unleaded petrol 153 Air recirculation Automatic load deactivation 197
ABS Climatronic 117 Automatic retractable cargo cover (Superb
Operation 155 Alarm Combi)) 101
Warning light 38 Switching off 55 Automatic transmission 145
Accessories 173 Triggering 55 Kickdown 147
Adaptive headlights (AHL) 70 Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction 148
Adjust Activating/deactivating 56 Selector lever lock 146
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila- Trailer 172 AUX
tion) 119 Anti-theft wheel bolts 208 Installation in the storage compartment 92
Head restraints 83 Antilock brake system (ABS) 155 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
Adjusting Armrest tion) 118
Belt height 15 Front 87 Adjust 119
Exterior mirrors 80 rear 96 Radio remote control 120
Interior mirror 79 Rear 87 Switching on/off 119
Manual air conditioning 114 Ashtray 91 Avoiding damage to the vehicle
Seats 81, 82 Driving through water 152
ASR
Steering wheel 10 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 152
Operation 155
Adjusting the seats 9, 81 warning light 37
Adjustment Assist systems 154 B
Range of light 68 ABS 38, 155 Ball head
Aerial 177 ASR 37, 155 Check fitting 168
See windows 179 Cruise Control System 161 Fitting 168
AHL 70 DSR 155 Ready position 167
Warning light 38 EDL 155 Removing 169
Airbag 16 ESC 37, 154 Battery
Deactivating 21 HBA 155 In the remote control key 215
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 21 HHC 156 Replace the remote control of the auxiliary
Deployment 16 Park assist 157 heater (parking heater) 216
Front airbag 17 Parking aid 156 Belts 12
Head airbag 20 START STOP 162 Belt tensioners 15
Indicator light 40 Audio
Bonnet
Knee airbag 18 see radio / navigation system 4 Closing 187
Modifications and damage to the airbag system 175 Auto Check Control 33 Opening 187
Side airbag 19 Automatic driving lamp control 70 Warning light 36

236 Index
Boot Car park ticket holder 89 Chrome parts
Automatic retraction (Superb Combi) 101 Carrier refer to Taking care of your vehicle 178
Extending variable loading floor 105 Roof rack 108 Cigarette lighter 91
Folding hook 99 Cavity protection 180 Cleaning
Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi) 102 CD changer 136 Alcantara 182
Removable Light (Superb Combi) 103 Covers of electrically heated seats 182
Central locking 50
Roll up boot cover (Superb Combi) 101 Fabrics 182
Central locking button 55
Side compartment with battery 102 Headlight lenses 179
Changing
Boot cover (Superb Combi) 101 Natural leather 181
brake fluid 193
Boot lid 57 Plastic parts 178
bulbs 223
automatic locking 58 Synthetic leather 182
Wheels 205
Warning light 36 Wheels 180
Changing a wheel
(Superb Combi) 58 Cleaning the vehicle
Follow-up work 206
Brake booster 144 Towing device 180
Preliminary work 206
Brake fluid 192 Remove and attaching a wheel 206 Cleaning vehicle 176
Checking 193 Climatronic 115
Changing brake
Information messages 35 Air recirculation 117
fluid 193
specification 193 automatic mode 116
Charging a vehicle battery 196
Brake linings Control elements 115
Check
warning light 41 Controlling blower 118
Fit ball head properly 168
Brakes Cooling system 116
Checking Defrosting windscreen 118
Brake assist systems 154
Battery electrolyte level 195 Setting the temperature 116
Brake booster 144
Brake fluid 193
Brake fluid 193 Clothes hook 94
Coolant 192
Handbrake 144 Cockpit
Engine oil 190
Information messages 35 12-Volt power outlet 92
Oil level 190
Running in 149 Ashtray 91
Windscreen washer fluid 188
Warning light 35 Cigarette lighter 91
Checks
Braking General view 29
Statutory checks 173
Information on braking 143 Lighting 73
Children and safety 22 Practical features 88
Break recommendation
See Fatigue detection 165 Child safety Storage compartments 88
Side airbag 24 Comfort control
Button in the driver's door
Electrical power windows 61 Child safety lock 55 window 63
Child seat COMING HOME 72
C Classification 25 Compartments 88
ISOFIX 25
Car care 173 Components of the puncture repair kits 209
on the front passenger seat 23
Jack 180 Computer
TOP TETHER 27
Car computer See multifunction display 44
Use of child seats 25
See multifunction display 44 Use of ISOFIX child seats 26

Index 237
Convenience operation diesel - E
sliding / tilting roof 65 particulate filter 39
sliding / tilting roof (Superb Estate) 67 Diesel fuel Economical and environmentally friendly driv-
Convenience turn signal 70 Operation in winter 185 ing 149
Coolant 191 Diesel particulate filter Economical driving
Checking 192 warning light 39 Ballast 151
Messages 36 Digital Clock Driving at full throttle 150
Replenishing 192 Time 32 Idling 150
Temperature gauge 31 Looking ahead 149
Dipstick 190
Warning light 36 Regular maintenance 151
Display 31 Saving energy 151
CORNER Compass points 48
See Fog lights with CORNER function 71 Short distances 150
Coolant temperature 31 Tyre pressure 150
Correct seated position 9 Fuel supply 32
Driver 9 EDL
Gear changes 43
Front passenger 10 Operation 155
Service intervals 48
Instructions 11 Electrical power windows 63
Display a low temperature 43
Rear seats 11 Button in the driver's door 61, 62
Display of the second speed 33 Button in the rear doors 63
Counter for distance driven 32 Distance driven 32 Operational faults 64
Cruise control system Door
Activating/deactivating 161 Electric boot lid
Child safety lock 55 Force limit 59
Changing the stored speed 162 Closing 52
Storing and maintaining speed 162 Manual operation 59
Emergency locking 217 Electric luggage compartment lid
Switching off temporarily 162 Emergency locking the driver's door 216
Warning light 41 Acoustic signals 61
Opening 52 Adjusting the top lid position 61
Cruise Control System 161 Warning light for open door 36 Deleting the top lid position 61
Cup holders 90 Door open Malfunctions 61
Warning light 36 Operating 59
D Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) 155 Electric sliding/tilting roof 64
DAY LIGHT Driving Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 155
see Daylight running lights 69 Abroad 153 Electronic immobilizer 139
Daylight running lights 69 Driving through water on streets 152
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 154
De-icing the windscreen and rear window 75 Emissions 229
Fuel consumption 229 Emergency
Deactivating an airbag 21 Activation of the sliding/tilting roof 218
Decorative films 179 Driving economically
Changing a wheel 205
Delayed locking of the boot lid Economical gear changing 149
Hazard warning light system 72
see boot lid 58 Driving through water 152 jump-starting 211
Diesel DSR 155 Jump-starting 211
refer to Fuel 185 DVD-preinstallation 136 Locking the door without a locking cylinder 217
Locking the driver's door 216

238 Index
 Selector lever-unlocking 217 ESC Fuel 183
Sliding/tilting roof 218 Function 154 Diesel 185
Start engine - KESSY 142 Warning light 37 Fuel gauge 32
Switching off the ignition –KESSY 143 Exhaust inspection system refer to Fuel 183
Towing the vehicle 213 Warning light 38 Refuelling 184
Towing the vehicle using the tow hitch 214 Extendable variable loading floor Unleaded petrol 184
tyre repair 209 Fixing set 106 Fuel consumption 149, 229
Unlocking the boot lid 217 Extending variable loading floor 105 Fuel reserve
Unlocking the driver's door 216 Divide boot 105 Warning light 39
Emergency equipment Movable lashing eyes 107 Fuses
Fire extinguisher 204 Partial extension 105 Assignment 220
First-aid kit 204 Colour coding 220
Jack 205 F Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 222
Vehicle tool kit 205 Replacing 220
Warning triangle 204 Fastening elements 99
Fatigue detection 165
Emissions 229 G
Function 165
Engine Gearbox
Information messages 165
Running in 148 Warning messages 33
Films 179
Engine compartment 186 Gear change
Brake fluid 193 Fire extinguisher 204
First-aid kit 204 Gear recommendation 43
Coolant 191 Information on the selected gear 43
Overview 188 Floor covering
Fixing 100 Gear changing
Vehicle battery 193
Gear stick 144
Engine number 228 Fog lights 71
Warning light 41 General view
Engine oil 189 Cockpit 29
Capacity 189 Fog lights with CORNER function 71
Generator
Checking 190 Folding hook 99
Indicator light 35
Note messages 36 Fold in passenger's mirror 80
Replenishing 191 Genuine parts 174
Footmats 145
Specifications 189 Glasses storage box 93
see Footmats 145
Engine oil level Glow plug system
Force limit
Warning light 37 Warning light 38
Electric boot lid (Superb Combi) 59
Engine oil pressure Power windows 63 GSM 124, 126
Warning light 36 Sliding/tilting roof 64
Entry lighting 75 Sliding/tilting roof (Superb Combi) 66 H
Environment 149 Front airbag 17 Handbrake 144
Environmental compatibility 151 Front door warning light 74 Warning light 35
Environmentally friendly driving 149 Front interior light 73 Hands-free system
EPC Voice control 131
Warning light 39 Hazard warning light system 72

Index 239
HBA 155 Operation 42 L
Head airbag 20 Service interval display 48
Headlight cleaning system instrument cluster Lamp failure
Headlight cleaning system 79 Auto Check Control 33 Warning light 38
Headlights Instrument cluster 30 Lamps
Driving abroad 153 Counter for distance driven 32 Warning light 38
Headlight cleaning system 79 Display 31 LEAVING HOME 72
Replacing a bulb 224 Display of the second speed 33 Lever
Head restraint 83 Fuel gauge 32 Main beam 69
Head restraints 83 Overview 30 Turn signal 69
Revolution counter 31 Windscreen wipers 78
Heater
see instrument cluster 30 Light
Windscreen and rear window 75
Speedometer 31 Cockpit 73
Heating
Temperature gauge 31 COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 72
Exterior mirrors 80
Warning lights 34 Fog lights with CORNER function 71
Seats 85
Interior monitor 56 Headlight range control 68
HHC 156 Instrument illumination 68
Internet connection 129
Hill Hold Control (HHC) 156 Low beam 68
ISOFIX 25
Hitch 166 Parking light 68
Accessories 169 J switching on and off 68
Drawback load 166 Travel mode 71
Horn 29 Jack 205
Light bulbs
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) 155 Maintenance 180
Rear light (Superb Combi) 226
Jacking points
Lighting
I Raise vehicle 207
Luggage compartment 97
Jump-starting 211
Ignition 139 Lights 67
Immobilizer 139 Adaptive headlights (AFS) 70
K
Individual settings Automatic driving lamp control 70
Locking 54 KESSY Daylight running 69
Unlocking 54 Information messages 53 Fog lights 71
Lock / unlock the steering 141 Hazard warning light system 72
Inertia reels 15
Locking 53 Headlight flasher 69
Information messages Starting the engine 142 Main beam 69
see KESSY 53 Switching off the engine 142 Parking lights 73
Information system 42 Switch off ignition 141 Rear fog light 71
Compass point display 48 Switch on ignition 141 Replacing bulbs 223
Display a low temperature 43 Unlocking 53 Tourist lights 71
Door warning 44 Key Turn signal 69
Gear recommendation 43 Starting the engine 139 Warning lights 34
MAXI DOT display 46 Stopping the engine 140 Lock
Multifunction display 44
Knee airbag 18 Vehicle key 51

240 Index
Locking Manually setting air conditioning nameplate 228
Individual settings 54 Control elements 112 Navigation system 4
KESSY 53 MAXI DOT Net partition 107
Remote control 52 See MAXI DOT display 46 Behind the front seats 108
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the in- MAXI DOT display 46 Behind the rear seats 107
side 55 Main menu 47 Removing and refitting the housing 108
Locking the door without a locking cylinder Operation 42 Nets 99
Emergency 217 Settings 47 Non-closable side pocket (Superb Combi) 102
Long cargo channel 96 maximum allowable Notes for driving with tyre repaired 211
Low beam 68 weights 228
Warning light 41 MDI O
Low tyre pressure warning Installation in the storage compartment 92
Oil
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 165 Media Note messages 36
Luggage compartment 97 see radio / navigation system 4 See Engine oil 190
Class N1 vehicles 98 MFD Oil pressure
Cover 100 See multifunction display 44 Note messages 36
Emergency unlocking 217 Mirror On-board computer
Fastening elements 99 Exterior mirrors 80 See multifunction display 44
Fix floor covering 100 Mirrors
Fixing nets 99 Operating
Interior mirror 79 the sun screen 66
Lighting 97 Vanity 76
Luggage net 100 Operating weight 229
Mobile phone 121, 124, 126
see boot lid 57 Operation in winter
Connecting to the hands-free system 124, 127
Side pockets 101 Diesel fuel 185
Modifications 173 Vehicle battery 195
Unlocking the boot lid 217
Modifications and technical alterations Original accessories 174
Variable loading floor 104
Airbags 175
Luggage compartment cover 100 Outside temperature 45
Service 174
Luggage compartment lid 57 Spoiler 175 Overview
Luggage net 100 Engine compartment 188
Multifunction display
Warning lights 34
Functions 44
M Information 45
P
Main beam 69 Memory 44
Warning light 41 Operation 42 Paintwork
Maintenance 151 Multimedia 134 See Paintwork care 178
Decorative films 179 AUX 135 Paintwork care 178
Manual air conditioning MDI 135 Park assist 157
adjusting 114 Departing from a parallel parking space 160
Recirculated air mode 114 N Finding a parking space 158
Manual gear changing N1 98 Information messages 160
see gear changing 144 Parking 159

Index 241
Park Assist Storage compartment in the front centre con- Synchronisation process 215
automatic emergency braking 160 sole 90 Unlocking 52
Operation 158 Storage compartment on passenger side 94 Remote control key
Parking Storage compartment on the driver's side 89 Replacing the battery 215
Park assist 157 Storage compartments in the doors 90 Removable lights (Superb Combi)
Parking aid 156 Storage compartment under passenger seat 94 Changing rechargeable light batteries 103
Parking aid 156 Storage compartment under the front armrest 92 Removable Light (Superb Combi)
Function 157 Storage net in front centre console 93 Remove light 103
Parking light 68 Storage pockets on the front seats 95
Removable ski bag 97
Part replacement 173 Puncture set 209
Removable variable loading floor
Passive safety Fit and remove 106
R
Before setting off 8 Repairs and technical alterations 173
Driving safety 8 Radiator fan 188 Replacing
Safety equipment 8 Radio 4 Bulb for main beam 225
Passive Safety 8 Radio reception Bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 225
Payload 229 See windows 179 Bulb for the fog light 225
Pedals 145 Radio remote control Bulb for the licence plate light 226
Footmats 145 Auxiliary heating 120 Bulb in rear light (Superb Combi) 227
Petrol Raise vehicle 207 Fuses 220
refer to Fuel 184 Rear-view mirror Fuses in the dash panel 220
Polishing the paintwork Exterior mirrors 80 Fuses in the engine compartment 222
See Taking care of your vehicle 178 Fold in passenger mirror 80 Low beam bulb 224
Synchronous adjustment of the rear-view mir- Vehicle battery 196
Power outlet
ror 80 Wiper blades 219
12 V 92
Rear fog light 71 Replenishing
Power Steering / steering lock (KESSY system)
Warning light 38 Coolant 192
warning light 36
Rear interior light 74 Engine oil 191
Power windows
Windscreen washer fluid 188
Button in the front passenger door 63 Rear mirror 79
Interior mirror 79 Revolution counter 31
Practical features 88
Rear seats Roof luggage rack
12 Volt power outlet 92
Seat folded forward Combi 88 Attachment points 109
Ashtray 91
Car park ticket holder 89 Rear window - heater 75 Roof rack 108
Cigarette lighter 91 Recirculated air mode Roof rack system
Clothes hook 94 Manual air conditioning 114 Roof load 109
Cup holders 90 Refuelling 184 Running in
Glasses storage box 93 Fuel 184 Brake pads 149
Removable ski bag 97 Engine 148
Remote control
Seat backrest with long cargo channel 96 The first 1,500 km 148
Locking 52
Storage compartment for umbrella 95 Tyres 149
Replacing the battery 215
Storage compartment in rear centre console 95

242 Index
S Storing in memory of remote control key 84 Speed symbol
Ventilated front seats 86 Refer to Wheels 202
SAFE Seats and practical features 81 Spoiler 175
see Safe securing 54 Adjusting the seats 81 Starting and stopping the engine - KESSY 140
SAFELOCK see Automatic gearbox Starting and stopping the engine using the key 138
see Safe securing 54 Manual gear shifting on the multifunction Starting engine
Safe securing 54 steering wheel 146 Jump-starting 211
Safety 8 Selector lever Starting the engine
Child safety 22 Refer to Selector lever 145 Jump-starting 211
Child safety seats 22 Selector lever lock / starter (system KESSY) Key 139
Correct seated position 9 Warning light 41 see KESSY 142
Head restraints 83 Service 174 START STOP 162
ISOFIX 25 Service interval display 48 Information messages 164
TOP TETHER 27
Setting 32 Jump-starting 212
Saving electrical energy 149 Manually deactivating/activating the system 164
Setting the 32
Screens Operating conditions for the system 163
Shelves 88
see Sun screen in the rear doors 76 operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 163
Shifting gears
Seals operation in vehicles with manual gearbox 163
Driving and saving energy 149
Taking care of your vehicle 178 system related automatic start-up 164
Side airbag 19
Seat belt Steering lock / unlock
warning light 35 Side compartment in boot with battery 102
see KESSY 141
Seat belts 12 Side compartments in the luggage compart-
Steering wheel 10
Belt tensioners 15 ment 101
Stopping the engine
Cleaning 183 ski bag 97
Key 140
fastening and unfastening 14 Sliding/tilting roof
Storage compartment in rear centre console 95
Height adjustment 15 Close (Superb Combi) 66
Closing 64 Storage compartment on passenger side 94
Inertia reels 15
The physical principle of a frontal collision 13 Closing the sun screen (Superb Combi) 66 Storage compartments 88
Seat features 85 Electric sliding/tilting roof 64 Storage compartment under passenger seat 94
Seats Emergency operation 218 Storage pockets on the front seats 95
Convenience features of passenger seat 87 Opening/closing the sun screen (Superb Combi) 66 Storing skis 96
Electric adjustment 82 Opening and tilting 64 Sun screen 76
Front armrest 87 Opening and tilting (Superb Combi) 66 Sun screen in the rear doors 76
Head restraints 83 Operation 64
Sun visors 76
Heating 85 Operation (Superb Combi) 66
Switch
Manually adjusting 82 Snow chains 203
see Ignition 139
Rear armrest 87 Spare wheel 200
Switching off the engine
save 84 Speedometer 31 see KESSY 142
Seat backrests 87 See speedometer 31
Switch light on and off 68

Index 243
Switch off ignition TOP TETHER 27 Tyre pressure monitoring 165
Refer to KESSY 141 Towing 213 Save tyre pressure values 166
Switch on ignition Towing a trailer 171 Tyre repair
Refer to KESSY 141 Towing device Preparations 210
Synchronous adjustment of the rear-view mir- Description 167 Pressure test 211
ror 80 Operation and maintenance 180 Sealing and inflating the tyre 210
Synthetic leather 182 Towing eye Tyres 197
Front 214 Inflation pressure 198
T Rear 214 Sizes 198
Towing protection 56 Tyre wear indicator 198
Tailgate
TwinDoor 58 Traction Control System (ASR) 155 Tyre size 201
see wheels 201
Taking care of the vehicle Trailer 170
Natural leather 181 13-pin socket 170
U
Seat belts 183 connection and disconnection 170
Taking care of your vehicle Loading 171 Umbrella
Automatic car wash system 177 Safety eye 170 Tray 95
Cavity protection 180 Towing a trailer 171 Underbody protection 180
Chrome parts 178 Trailer operation 166 Unleaded petrol 153
Cleaning the wheels 180 Trailer stabilisation 172 Unlock
Decorative films 179 Transport Vehicle key 51
Door lock cylinders 179 Luggage compartment 97 Unlocking
Headlight lenses 179 Roof rack 108 Individual settings 54
High-pressure cleaner 177 Transporting children safely 22 KESSY 53
Plastic parts 178 Triangle 204 Remote control 52
Polishing the paintwork 178 Unlocking and locking 50
TSA 172
Rubber seals 178
Turn signal 69 Using the information system 42
Taking care of the interior 181
Turn signal system Using the selector lever 145
Taking care of your vehicle exterior 177
Washing by hand 176 Warning light 41
Twindoor V
Wash system 177
Wax treatment 178 see boot lid 57 Variable loading floor 104
Taking care of your vehicles Two-way radio systems 121 Dividing the luggage compartment 104
Fabric covers 182 Tyre Remove 104
Technical data 228 Explanation of the labelling 201 slides off on aluminium rails 105
Telephone 124, 126 see wheels 201 Vehicle battery
Temporary spare wheel 200 Tyre inflation pressure Automatic load deactivation 197
Warning light 40 Charging 196
Tilting roof
Tyre load bearing capacity Checking the battery electrolyte level 195
see Electric sliding/tilting roof 64
Refer to Wheels 201 Cover 195
Tiptronic 146 Disconnecting and reconnecting 196
Tools 205

244 Index
 Operation in winter 195 Water Windscreen washers
Replacing 196 Driving through 152 Windscreen washers 78
Safety instructions 193 Wax treatment Windscreen washer system 188
Vehicle care See Taking care of your vehicle 178 Windscreen wiper
Alcantara 182 Weather conditions 173 Replacing the rear window wiper blade 219
Fabrics 182 Wheel bolts Windscreen wipers
Synthetic leather 182 Anti-theft wheel bolts 208 Operating 78
washing 176 Caps 201 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 219
Vehicle Condition Loosening and tightening 207 Windscreen washer fluid 188
see Auto Check Control 33 Wheel rims 197 Windscreen wipers and washers 77
Vehicle data sticker 228 Wheels Winter
Vehicle dimensions 230 Changing 205 De-icing windows 179
Vehicle height 230 Full trim 200 Winter operation 203
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 228 General information 197 Snow chains 203
Vehicle key Load index 201 Winter tyres 203
lock 51 Replacing wheels 198 Winter tyres
unlock 51 Service life of tyres 198 See Wheels 203
Vehicle length 230 Snow chains 203 WLAN 130
Spare wheel 200 MAXI DOT 131
Vehicle tool kit 205
Speed symbol 202 Network connection 130
Vehicle width 230
Storing wheels 198 Switching off 130
Visibility 75 Temporary spare wheel 200 Switching on 130
Visors Tyre pressure 198
see Sun screen 76 Tyre size 201
see Sun visors 76 Tyre sizes 198
Tyre wear indicator 198
W Unidirectional tyres 199
Warning at excessive speeds 46 Winter tyres 203
Warning lights 34 Wi-Fi 130
warning messages Windows 179
Diesel particulate filter 39 De-icing 179
Warning symbols See Electrical power windows 61
see Warning lights 34 Windscreen
Warning triangle 204 De-icing 179
Washing Heater 75
Automatic car wash system 177 Windscreen washer fluid
by hand 176 Checking 188
Chrome parts 178 Replenishing 188
High-pressure cleaner 177 Warning light 40
Washing vehicles 176 Winter 188

Index 245